Dear Customer, Congratulations and thank you for choosing LANCIA. We wrote this handbook to help you get the most out of your car’s outstanding qualities. We advise to read it right through before taking to the road for the first time. You will find information, tips and important warnings regarding the driving of your car to help you derive the maximum from your LANCIA’s technological features. You will discover unique features and details; you will also find essential information for car care and servicing as well as driving and operat- ing safety not to mention the long-term wellbeing of your LANCIA.

The enclosed Warranty Booklet lists the services you have acquired and contains details relating to the following: • the Warranty Certificate, with terms and conditions for maintaining it • the range of services offered to LANCIA owners. We are sure that these instruments will help you easily attune to and appreciate both your new car and the LANCIA team that will be on hand to provide you with any help you may require.

Best regards and have a great trip. MUST BE READ! REFUELLING Petrol engines: only refuel with unleaded petrol with octane rating (RON) no less than 95. K Diesel engines: only refuel with diesel fuel conforming to the European specification EN590.

ENGINE START-UP Make sure the handbrake is pulled up; put the gear lever into neutral; press the clutch pedal down to the floor without touching the accelerator; then: petrol engines: turn the ignition key to AVV and release it as soon as the engine starts. diesel engines: turn the ignition key to MAR and wait for the instrument panel warning lights ¢ and m to go out, then turn the ignition key to AVV and release it as soon as the engine starts.

PARKING OVER INFLAMMABLE MATERIAL When functioning normally, the catalytic converter reaches high temperatures. For this reason do not park ┮ the car over inflammable material, grass, dry leaves, pine needles, etc.: fire hazard.

PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT A system for continuously monitoring emission system components to ensure greater environmental U protection is fitted in your car. ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES If, after buying the car, you decide to add electrical accessories (that will gradually drain the battery), visit a Lancia Dealership. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the car's electric ▵ system can support the required load.

CODE card Keep the code card in a safe place, not in the car. You should always keep the electronic code written on the CODE card with you in case you need to carry out an emergency start-up procedure.

SCHEDULED SERVICING Correct maintenance of the car is essential for ensuring it stays in tip-top condition and safeguards its safety features, its environmental friendliness and low running costs for a long time to come.

THE OWNER HANDBOOK CONTAINS … … information, tips and important warnings regarding the safe, correct driving of your car, and its maintenance. Pay particular attention to the symbols " (personal safety) # (environmental protection) â (the car’s wellbeing). TRAVELLING SAFELY AND IN HARMONY WITH NATURE

Safety and respect for the environment are the guidelines that inspired the Lybra’s design from the drawing board onwards. This concept has meant that the Lybra has been able to face and pass the strictest safety tests. So much so that, from this point of view, the car is the best in its class and has probably already incorpo- rated features that belong to the future. In addition, ongoing research into new and effective features to help safeguard the environment makes the Lybra and car to imitate for this reason as well. All versions are in fact equipped with environmental protection devices that reduce harmful exhaust fumes in compliance with the limits provided for by current legislation. What is more, every single component of the Lybra is fully recyclable. At the end of your car’s life- span any LANCIA dealership would be please to make arrangements for your car to be recycled. Nature benefits in two ways: there is no pollution for waste disposal and the demand for raw materi- als is reduced. Nature benefits in two ways: there is no pollution for waste disposal and the demand for raw mate- rials is reduced. SAFEGUARDING THE ENVIRONMENT Safeguarding the environment has directed the design and manufacturing of the Lybra right from the start. The result is the use of materials and the perfection of devices that can reduce or sweep- ingly reduce harmful influences on the environment. The Lybra, equipped with environment safeguarding devices which curtail harmful exhaust gas emissions, is ready to travel well ahead of the most stringent international pollution control stan- dards.

USE OF ENVIRONMENT-FRIENDLY MATERIALS None of the car’s components contain asbestos. Padding and the climate control system do not contain CFC (chlorofluorocarbides) - the gases considered responsible for the destruction of the ozone layer. Other substances that might pollute air and water tables, such as the cadmium in the rust-proof coating of the bolts and the chromates in some paints, have been completely replaced with substances that do not harm the environment. DEVICES FOR REDUCING PETROL ENGINE EMISSIONS Three-way catalytic converter (catalytic exhaust pipe) Carbon monoxide, nitrogen oxides and unburned hydrocarbons are the main harmful components in exhaust gasses. The catalytic converter is a “miniature laboratory” where a very high percentage of these compo- nents are converted into harmless substances. This conversion is aided by minute particles of precious metals on the ceramic core enclosed in a stainless steel container.

Lambda sensor All petrol versions are fitted with this device. It ensures that air and fuel are constantly mixed in the correct proportion. This is a fundamental condition for proper engine and catalytic converter operation.

Fuel evaporation canister As it is impossible to stop the build up of petrol fumes, also when the engine is not running, the system traps them in a special container holding active carbon. The fumes are sucked in from here and burnt while the engine is running. DEVICES FOR REDUCING DIESEL ENGINE EMISSIONS Oxidising catalytic converter This device converts the pollution substances in the exhaust gas (carbon monoxide, unburned hydrocarbons and particulate) into harmless substances, thus reducing the smokiness and smell associated with diesel engine exhaust fumes. The catalytic converter consists of a stainless steel case containing a honeycomb ceramic core in which there is precious metal which carries out the catalysing action.

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (E.G.R. Cooled) system This system recirculates or reuses part of the exhaust gas in a proportion which varies according to engine operation conditions. When necessary, it is used for the control of nitrogen oxide emissions. THE SIGNS TO HELP YOU DRIVE CORRECTLY

The signs you see on this page are very important. They highlight those parts of the handbook where, more than elsewhere, you should stop for a minute and read carefully. As you can see, each sign has a different symbol to make it immediately clear and easy to identify the subjects in the different areas:

Personal safety. Environmental protection. Car wellbeing. Important. Total or partial failure to This shows you the correct procedures Important. Total or partial failure to follow these instructions can place to follow to ensure that the car does follow these instructions will result in driver, passengers or others in serious not harm the environment. the risk of serious damage to the car danger. and may invalidate the warranty as well. SYMBOLS DANGER SYMBOLS

Special coloured labels have been at- Battery Coil tached near or actually on some of the components of your Lybra. These la- Corrosive fluid. High voltage. bels bear symbols that remind you of the precautions to be taken as regards that particular component. A list of the symbols to be found on your Lybra is given below with the Battery Belts and pulleys name of the component to which it re- lates at the side of it. Explosion. Moving parts: keep parts of the body and clothes These symbols are divided into the away. following four categories: danger, pro- hibition, warning and obligation.

Fan Climate control tubing May cut in automatically Do not open. Gas under even when the engine is high pressure. turned off.

Expansion tank Do not remove the cap when the coolant is hot.

9 PROHIBITION SYMBOLS WARNING SYMBOLS

Battery Catalytic converter Windscreen wiper Keep away from naked Do not park over inflam- Only use fluid of the type flames. mable materials. See Chap- specified in the section “Ca- ter: “Protecting the emis- pacities”. sion control devices”.

Battery Power steering Engine Keep away from chil- Do not exceed the maxi- Use only the oil specified in dren. mum fluid level in the the section “Capacities”. reservoir. Use only the fluid specified in the section “Capacities”.

Heat shields - belts - Brake circuit Unleaded petrol vehicle pulleys - fan Do not exceed the maxi- Use only unleaded petrol Do not touch. mum fluid level in the with a rated octane number reservoir. Use only the fluid (RON) of 95. specified in the section “Capacities”.

10 OBLIGATION SYMBOLS

Diesel engines Battery Use diesel fuel only. Protect your eyes. DIESEL

Expansion tank Battery Only use fluid of the type Jack specified in the section “Ca- pacities”. See the Owner handbook.

11

CONTENTS

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

DRIVING YOUR CAR

IN AN EMERGENCY

CAR MAINTENANCE

LYBRA STATION WAGON

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

INDEX

13 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

ou are recommended to read this chapter CHECK CONTROL...... 59 Y LANCIA ICS WITH MULTIFUNCTIONAL sitting comfortably in your new Lybra. In this DISPLAY...... 62 way you will be able to identify the parts SOUND SYSTEM ...... 73 described immediate and see for yourself what CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ...... 103 you have just read. AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ...... 105 In short, you will increase your knowledge of SUPPLEMENTARY HEATER ...... 115 your Lybra with its controls and other devices. STEERING COLUMN STALKS...... 115 Later, when you start the engine and join the CONTROLS ...... 118 traffic you will make a host of other pleasant MANUAL GEARBOX ...... 121 discoveries. CRUISE CONTROL ...... 122 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT ...... 125 SUNROOF...... 131 DASHBOARD...... 15 DOORS...... 134 IGNITION SWITCH ...... 16 BOOT ...... 138 THE LANCIA CODE SYSTEM...... 17 THE ELECTRONIC ALARM ...... 21 BONNET ...... 141 INDIVIDUAL SETTINGS...... 28 FUEL FILLER CAP ...... 143 SEAT BELTS...... 34 CELLULAR PHONE SET-UP ...... 144 TRANSPORTING CHILDREN IN SAFETY..... 37 ROOF RACK AND SKI RACK ...... 145 PRETENSIONERS ...... 42 ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHTS...... 146 FRONT AND SIDE AIRBAGS...... 43 EOBD SYSTEM ...... 148 INSTRUMENT PANEL...... 50 ABS ...... 149 INSTRUMENTS ...... 51 ESP SYSTEM (ASR - HH - HBA)...... 151 WARNING LIGHTS...... 53 SOUND SYSTEM DEVICES...... 154

14 DASHBOARD The presence and the position of the instruments and warning lights may vary according to the version.

fig. 1 P4T0806

1) Side window vents - 2) Side vents - 3) Headlight slant adjuster - 4) Instrument panel - 5) Instrument panel dimmer - 6) ICS multifunc- tional display: sound system, clock, trip computer and check control - 7) Central vents - 8) Windscreen vent - 9) Passenger’s airbag (where fitted) - 10) Passenger’s airbag deactivation switch - 11) Glove compartment - 12) Cup/can holder - 13) Hazard light switch - 14) Auto- matic climate control and heated rear window switch - 15) Ashtray and cigar lighter - 16) Front and rear fog light switch - 17) Card pocket - 18) Windscreen wiper/washer stalk - 19) Ignition switch - 20) Horn - 21) Steering wheel height adjustment lever - 22) Driver’s airbag - 23) Outside light control stalk - 24) Glove compartment/fusebox cover - 25) Bonnet opening lever.

15 IGNITION SWITCH Always remove the igni- STEERING COLUMN LOCK tion key when you get out To engage the lock: remove the ig- of the car. This will pre- The key can be turned to four posi- nition key at STOP or PARK and vent anyone from accidentally tions (fig. 2). turn the steering wheel until it locks. working the controls. Remember STOP: engine off, key can be re- to apply the handbrake and, if the To release the lock: rock the steer- moved, steering column locked. Some car is faced down on a steep slope ing wheel slightly as you turn the ig- electrical devices can be worked (e.g. engage the first gear. If it is facing nition key to MAR. sound system). up, engage the reverse gear. MAR: driving position. All electrical devices can be worked. It is absolutely forbidden AVV: engine ignition. to carry out whatever af- PARK: engine off, parking lights on, ter-market operation in- key can be removed, steering column volving steering system or steering locked. To turn the key to PARK, column modifications (e.g.: instal- press button A. lation of anti-theft device) that could badly affect performance and safety, cause the lapse of war- ranty and also result in non-com- pliance of the car with homologa- tion requirements.

If the ignition switch has P4T0005 been tampered with (e.g. someone has tried to steal Never remove the ignition your car), get a Lancia Dealership key while the car is mov- to make sure it is still functioning ing. The steering wheel properly before you start driving would automatically lock as soon again. as you try to turn it. This also ap- plies when the car is being towed. fig. 2 16 THE LANCIA CODE KEYS The CODE card (fig. 4) is also sup- plied with the keys and bears the fol- Together with the car are delivered: SYSTEM lowing: – 2 keys A (fig. 3) with incorporated A - The electronic code, to be used To further protect your car from remote control if the car is fitted with for emergency starting. an electronic alarm; theft, it has been fitted with an engine B - The mechanical key code to be immobilising system (Lancia CODE) – 1 key with incorporate remote con- given to the Lancia Dealership which is automatically activated when trol plus 1 mechanical type key if the when ordering duplicate keys. the ignition key is removed. An elec- car is not fitted with an electronic tronic device, in fact, is fitted in each C and D - The spaces for electronic alarm. ignition key grip. The device trans- alarm remote control stickers. mits a radio-frequency signal when The code numbers written on the the engine is started through a special CODE card must be kept in a safe aerial built into the ignition switch. In order to ensure the place (not in the car). The modulated signal is a password. greatest efficiency of elec- You should always have the elec- Only if the control unit recognises the tronic devices incorpo- tronic code number written on the key can the engine be started. rated in the key, it is recom- CODE card with you at all times in mended that the latter should not case you need to perform an emer- be exposed to direct sunlight gency start-up. and/or heavy shocks. P4T0742 P4T0743

fig. 3 fig. 4 17 All the keys and the CODE – button D, to operate the central IMPORTANT Anomalous glass op- card must be handed over door locking system, boot/tailgate eration (glasses sliding up or down the new owner when selling locking, to switch the electronic alarm jerkily) may indicate a loss of cali- the car. on (where fitted) and to lock the fuel bration of the anti-crushing safety de- filler cap; vice. In this case, the system should be reinitialised as described in chap- – button E, to open the boot/tailgate ter “Electric window winders” in the when the alarm is on; Owner Handbook, to which this Sup- The key (fig. 5) is provided with: – led F, which indicates the remote plement is attached to. – a metal insert A that can be locked control operation and the internal The metal insert A (fig. 6) of the key up in the key handle by pressing but- battery status. operates: ton B; Pressing down (for more than 2 sec- – the ignition switch; – button B, used to snap-open the onds) button C will open all door win- metal insert; dows to aerate the passenger com- – the steering column lock disen- partment: window opening is inter- gagement; – button C, to operate the central rupted when the button is released. door locking system, to switch the – the driver’s door lock; electronic alarm off (where fitted) and Similarly, door windows can be – the boot lock; to unlock the fuel filler cap; completely closed when closing the doors by pressing down (for more than 2 seconds) button D. Window closing is stopped when re- leasing button D. P4T0744 P4T0745

fig. 5 fig. 6 18 – the passenger’s side air bag deac- OPERATION 2) If the ¢ warning light stays on tivating switch; (with U warning light) the code was Each time the ignition key is re- not recognised. In this case, turn the – the glove compartment lock moved from position STOP, or key to STOP and then back to MAR. (where fitted). PARK, the Lancia CODE system will If the engine remains immobilised, try deactivate the engine electronic con- To remove the metal insert from the with the other keys provided. trol unit functions. key grip, press button B. If you are still unable to start the en- When the key is turned to MAR to gine, carry out the emergency starting When pressing button B start the engine, the Lancia CODE procedure and contact your Lancia (fig. 6), take care to prevent system sends a password code to the Dealership. the metal insert A from engine control unit to deactivate the causing harm or damage when it function lock. The encoded and vari- When the car is travelling and the comes out. The button B should able code, randomly selected from key is at MAR: only be pressed when the key is over four billion possible combina- 1) If the ¢ warning light comes on away from the body, in particular tions, is only sent if, in turn, the sys- while the car is moving, this means from the eyes, and from objects tem has recognised the code trans- that the system is running a self-test that can be spoilt (e.g. clothes). mitted by the electronic device built (e.g. due to a voltage drop). The first Make sure the key can never be into the ignition key via an aerial sur- time you stop, you can test the system touched by others, especially chil- rounding the ignition switch. as follows: switch off the engine by dren, who may inadvertently press turning the ignition key to STOP then 1) If the code is recognised, the ¢ the button B. turn the key back to MAR: the warn- warning light on the instrument panel ing light ¢ should come on and then will flash briefly: this means that the go out in about one second. If the protection system has recognised the warning light fails to go out, leave the key code and disabled the engine im- To insert the metal insert A (fig. 5) key at STOP for longer than 30 sec- mobilising system; turn the key to into the key grip, keep the button B onds. If the problem persists, contact AVV, to start. pressed and turn the insert in the di- a Lancia Dealership. rection shown by the arrow until hearing the locking click. Then release button B.

19 2) If the warning light ¢ flashes, the DUPLICATE KEYS REPLACING THE BATTERIES car is not protected by the engine im- When you ask for extra keys, re- Replace the batteries with equivalent mobilising system. Contact a Lancia member that all the keys, both the new batteries which can be purchased at Dealership immediately and get ones and those you already possess, common stores, if the key led F them to store the codes of all the keys must be stored in the memory (up to a flashes briefly once and led L (Fig. in the memory. maximum of seven keys). Go directly 12) in front of the steering wheel stays to your Lancia Dealership, taking on with fixed light for approximately with you all the keys in your posses- two minutes (after switching the If the Lancia CODE sion, the CODE card, personal ID and alarm off), when button (C, D or E warning light flashes at the car’s ownership papers. Copies of fig. 5) is pressed. half a second frequency the CODE card can be ordered from after approximately two seconds your Lancia Dealership. from when the key is turned to MAR, the key code has not be stored in the system’s memory and IMPORTANT The codes of any consequently the car is not pro- keys that are not available when the Used batteries pollute the tected by the Lancia CODE system new storage procedure is carried out environment. Dispose of against theft. In this case, go to a will be deleted from the memory to them in the special con- Lancia Dealership to have the key prevent any lost or stolen keys being tainers, as specified by current leg- codes stored. used to start the engine. islation or take them to a Lancia Dealership, which will deal with their disposal. IMPORTANT The code may not be completely transmitted if the key is turned very rapidly from STOP to AVV. This will prevent the engine from starting. Try again turning the key slower.

20 Replace the batteries as follows: ELECTRONIC ALARM (where fitted) – press button B (fig. 7) and bring the metal insert A to the open posi- The electronic alarm system fitted in – illicit opening of doors, bonnet and tion; the car complies with EC directive boot (perimetral surveillance); 95/56 and consists of: – by means of a fine tip screwdriver, – ignition switch operation; turn the opening device G to : and – a radio-frequency transmitter (built into the ignition key); – moving bodies in the passenger remove the battery holder H; compartment (volumetric surveil- – replace the battery I observing the – a radio-frequency receiver; lance); proper bias; – an electronic control unit with – attempts to lift the car; built-in siren; – refit the battery holder into the key – cutting of battery cables. and secure it, by turning the device G – volumetric sensors which can be to ;. deactivated (built-into the front ceil- The volumetric surveillance function ing lamp); can be deactivated, as required. Fol- low the instructions given below. – an anti-lifting sensor; – a bonnet opening switch; – boot/tailgate opening switch; – door opening switches; – warning LEDs. The electronic alarm is controlled by P4T0747 the receiver and is switched on by P4T0748 pressing button D (fig. 8) and switched off by pressing button C. Both buttons are built-into the ignition key, which sends the secret and variable code. The electronic alarm - which addi- tionally operates the central door locking system - protects from the fol- fig. 7 fig. 8 lowing actions: 21 IMPORTANT The engine immobil- IMPORTANT Change the remote A self-test is run when the alarm is ising system is governed by the Lan- control batteries as soon as possible if switched on. The test is signaled by cia CODE system and is automatically LED F flashes briefly only once when LED L which flashes as follows: activated when the ignition key is re- button D is pressed. The LED will – four flashes in one second: no work normally after button D is moved. faults found; pressed for the second time after re- REMOTE CONTROL (fig. 8) placing the batteries. – eight flashes in one second: door/bonnet/boot open or faulty sen- The remote control is built into the SWITCHING THE ALARM ON sor; ignition key and is equipped with: The alarm can only be switched on – fixed light: faulty volumetric or – button D for switching the alarm on; with the ignition key at STOP, PARK anti-lift sensor. or removed. – button C for switching the alarm off; If a fault is found, the concerned To switch the alarm on, press and component is cut out and the system – button E for opening the boot with release button D (fig. 8) on the igni- beeps to signal the event. the alarm on; tion key. – LED F. With the exception of certain markets, Surveillance a beep will be heard, the direction indi- The buttons operate the control and cators will light up for approximately LED L (fig. 9) will flash to indicate the LED flashes while the transmitter three seconds, the doors will be locked that the system surveillance function is sending the code to the receiver. and LED L (fig. 9) in front of the steer- is on. ing wheel will start flashing. The LED will flash as long as the This code (of the “rolling code” system is operating. type) is encoded by means of a spe- cific algorithm and consequently P4T0807 changes at each transmission. IMPORTANT The electronic alarm The radio-frequency remote control operation is adapted to the rules in allows to operate the alarm system force in the various countries. also from a certain distance (up to ap- proximately 10 metres from the car), without the need of being addressed towards the receiver and also if the windows are dirty. fig. 9 22 Self-test SWITCHING ON THE ALARM AUTOMATIC SWITCH-ON and door/bonnet/boot checks AND CUTTING OUT THE (where fitted) VOLUMETRIC SURVEILLANCE Check that the doors, bonnet and In some markets, the electronic boot are correctly closed if a second The function can be cut out (for ex- alarm can be programmed to be beep is heard when the alarm is ample, when pets are left in the car) by switched on automatically. carrying out the following operations switched on. Then try to switch the The electronic alarm is automati- alarm back on. in rapid sequence. With the key at MAR, turn the key to STOP, then cally switched on (without operating The system will cut out the doors, back to MAR and then back to STOP the door locking system) after ap- bonnet and boot from the surveillance again. Remove the ignition key. The proximately 30 seconds from when if they are not properly closed. LED in front of the steering wheel will the car is left. This condition is de- light up for approximately two seconds tected by the system by the following If the doors, the bonnet and the boot to indicate the function has been cut sequence of actions: are properly closed and the second out. beep is heard again, it means that the – ignition key turned from MAR to system self-test function has found a To restore the volumetric surveil- STOP; lance function, take the key to MAR fault. Contact a Lancia Dealership. – opening and closing of the last and hold it there for longer than 30 door. seconds. If you want to operate an electrical The automatic switch-on will be in- device which runs when the key is at terrupted if a door, the bonnet or the MAR (e.g. the electrical window boot is opened during the 30 second winders) when the volumetric sur- timeout. The 30 seconds timeout will veillance function is cut out, turn the start from zero after closure. key to MAR, operate the required Press button C (fig. 8) on the igni- control and turn the key back to tion key to switch the alarm off after STOP within 30 seconds. In this way an automatic switch-on. the the volumetric surveillance func- tion will not be switched on again.

23 SWITCHING THE ALARM OFF 1 flash: front right-hand door VOLUMETRIC PROTECTION To switch the alarm off, press re- 2 flashes: front left-hand door Do not leave passengers or pets in the mote control button C (fig. 8). Then, 3 flashes: rear right-hand door parked car and completely close the the system performs the following ac- windows and the sunroof (where fitted) tions (with the exception of certain 4 flashes: rear left-hand door to ensure the correct operation of the markets): 5 flashes: volumetric or anti-lifting volumetric sensors. Furthermore, make sure that the doors, bonnet and – the direction indicators will flash sensors boot/tailgate are properly closed. twice; 6 flashes: bonnet – two short siren sound signals 7 flashes: boot/tailgate ANTI-LIFTING SENSOR (“BEEP”); 8 flashes: tampered wires to start en- The anti-lifting sensor detects vari- – the system will unlock the doors. gine ations in slant to signal lifting or par- 9 flashes: tampered battery wires tial lifting (e.g. to remove a wheel) of the car. IMPORTANT If LED in the car 10 flashes: three or more causes of stays on (for up to two minutes or un- alarm. The sensor can detect minimal vari- til the ignition key is turned to MAR) ations in car trim along both longitu- when the alarm is switched off: dinal axis and transversal axis. varia- – If the LED stays on (fixed light) the tions in trim lower than 0.5°/min. remote control batteries are flat. Re- (such as, for example, a slow deflat- place them. ing tyre) are not taken into account. – If the LED flashes differently from usual, an attempt has been made to break into the car. The type of break-in attempt is signalled by the number of flashes:

24 OPENING THE BOOT WHEN WHAT TRIGGERS STOPPING THE ALARM THE ALARM IS ON THE ALARM OFF When the alarm is on, the boot can The alarm will be triggered off in the To stop the alarm, press button C be opened by pressing button E following conditions: (fig. 8) on the remote control. If this (fig. 8) on the ignition key. – if a door, the bonnet or the is unsuccessful, owing to run-down In this case, the operating logic of boot/tailgate is opened; remote control battery or to a system the alarm is as follows: fault, open the door after unlocking – if the battery or the cables are dis- the lock with the key, then put the – the volumetric surveillance func- connected or cut; tion is deactivated; key into the ignition switch and turn – if there is an intrusion in the pas- it to MAR. – the anti-lift sensor is deactivated; senger compartment, e.g. a broken To switch the alarm on again, turn – the boot/tailgate sensor is deacti- window (volumetric protection). the key to STOP and remove it, then vated. – if an attempt is made to start the press button D on the remote control engine (key at MAR); The normal surveillance functions after closing the doors. If the alarm is are reactivated when the boot/tailgate – if an attempt has been made to lift not switched on and LED F on the re- is closed. the car. mote control gives off only a short According to the markets, the alarm flash, the key battery needs replacing. can operate the siren (for up to three To replace the battery, follow the in- 26 second cycles) and the direction structions shown in chapter “Lancia indicators (for approximately four or CODE System”. five minutes, only where this is al- If, with the remote control battery lowed). The intervention modality charged, the alarm cannot be and the number of cycles can vary ac- switched on, contact your Lancia cording to the markets. Dealership to have the system A maximum number of acoustic/vi- checked. sual cycles is foreseen in all cases. After the alarm cycle, the system re- turns to its normal surveillance func- tion.

25 IMPORTANT If the car is to be REPLACING THE BATTERIES Replace the batteries as follows: stored for a long period of time (over Replace the batteries with equivalent – press button B (fig. 11) and bring three weeks) and safety conditions batteries which can be purchased at the metal insert A to the open posi- permitting, it is recommended that common stores, if the key led F tion; central locking is actuated by turning flashes briefly once and led L (fig. 12) the key in the door lock, so as not to – by means of a fine tip screwdriver, in front of the steering wheel stays on switch the alarm on and, thus, avoid turn the opening device G to : and with fixed light for approximately two running down the battery. remove the battery holder H; minutes (after switching the alarm off), when button (C, D or E fig. 10) – replace the battery I observing the is pressed. proper bias; – refit the battery holder into the key and secure it, by turning the device G to ;. P4T0744 P4T0747 P4T0807

fig. 10 fig. 11 fig. 12 26 Used batteries pollute the REQUEST FOR ADDITIONAL MINISTERIAL HOMOLOGATION environment. Dispose of REMOTE CONTROLS In the respect of the legislation in them in the special con- force in each country in the matter of tainers, as specified by current leg- The receiver will acknowledge up to radio-frequency devices, please note islation or take them to a Lancia 8 remote controls. that: Dealership, which will deal with If extra remote controls are ordered, their disposal. in addition to the ones originally sup- – the market-specific homologation plied, remember to carry out the same numbers are listed in the following programming procedure for all the re- section: Radio-frequency remote con- mote controls when the car is new. trol: ministerial homologation; The control unit will subsequently – the homologation number is exclude this type of programming to printed on the component for markets prevent anyone else programming the where this is required. control unit to acknowledge other re- The code marking may also be mote controls. printed on the transmitter and/or the If, therefore, you ever need a new re- receiver for versions/markets where mote control, go directly to a Lancia this is required. Dealership, taking with you all the keys in your possession, the CODE card, personal identification and the car ownership papers.

27 INDIVIDUAL Height adjustment ELECTRICALLY Lift or lower lever B repeatedly to ADJUSTABLE SEATS SETTINGS raise or lower the seat. (where fitted) (fig. 15) Only adjust the driver’s Only make adjustments of the dri- seat when the car is sta- Adjusting the reclining seat back ver’s seat when the car is stationary. tionary. Turn knob C forwards or backwards to straighten or recline the seat back. The adjustment is only possible when the ignition key is at MAR (with the exception of the driver’s seat back Lumbar adjustment MANUALLY ADJUSTABLE fore/aft adjustment, the height adjust- FRONT SEATS (fig. 13-14) Press button E (fig. 14) to adjust the ment and seat back adjustment). driver’s seat lumbar support. Use controls A and B (fig. 15): Moving the seat backwards or ¯˙ forwards to adjust the seat forwards and backwards (control A); Lift lever A (fig. 13) and push the seat backwards or forwards; you are in the correct position for driving when your hands are resting on the steering wheel rim and your arms are slightly bent. Once you have released the lever, check that the seat is firmly locked in the runners by trying to move it back P4T0007 and forth. Failure to lock the seat in P4T0270 place could result in the seat moving suddenly and dangerously.

fig. 13 fig. 14 28 to adjust the height of the front The LEDs on the dashboard will same time until two confirmation and rear part of the driver’s seat light up (A-fig. 16 = driver’s seat, B = beeps are heard. and the rear part only of the passen- passenger’s seat). The previously stored position will ger’s seat (control A); automatically be deleted when a new ¯˙to adjust the seat back (control B). Storing the driver’s seat positions position is stored under the same but- (where fitted-fig. 17) ton. Driver’s seat lumbar adjustment The system allows to store and recall To recall a position, press the re- This device makes it possible to vary two different driver’s seat and exter- spective button “1”, “2” or “3” with back support and improve comfort. nal rearview mirror positions. the door open. The seat will move au- Press the front part of the button C (fig. The seat and rearview mirror posi- tomatically and stop when the stored 15) to increase the support and the rear tion can only be stored when the ig- position is reached. A confirmation part of the button to decrease it. nition key is at MAR. beep will be heard. Adjust the driver’s seat position and Heating (where fitted) IMPORTANT The lumbar adjust- the external rearview mirrors as de- ment and the seat heating function Press button D (fig. 15) to switch scribed. are not controlled by the stored seat the seat heating on. Press the button Press button “MEM” and either but- position system. again to switch it off. ton “1”, “2” or “3” corresponding to each of the stored positioned at the P4T0333 P4T0271 P4T0332

fig. 15 fig. 16 fig. 17 29 HEAD RESTRAINTS (fig. 19) Front seats (fig. 20) Rear central seat To improve passenger safety, the To adjust the front head restraint Versions with single seat (fig. 22): height of the front and rear side head height, move it upwards to the re- To improve passenger safety the restraints can be adjusted so that the quired position. To lower the front height of the head restraint can be ad- head rests on them properly. head restraint, keep button A de- justed. pressed and return it to the required position. The front head restraints can To raise it, grip the head restraint at be adjusted for tilt by moving them in the base and pull it upwards com- the direction of the arrows as shown pletely until hearing a click. Remember that the head in the figure below. Front head re- restraints should be ad- straints are not removable. To lower it, press it downwards justed to support the back keeping button A pressed until hear- of your head and not your neck. Rear side seats (fig. 21) ing a click. Only if they are in this position will To adjust the rear side head restraint Versions with twin seat (fig. 23): they be able to provide effective height, lift it from its housing until protection in the event of a rear- hearing a click. To adjust the rear central head re- end shunt. straint height, lift it from its housing To bring it back to the original po- until hearing a click. sition: press buttons A and lower the head restraint until it fits into the seat back. P4T0232 P4T0701 P4T0702

fig. 19 fig. 20 fig. 21 30 To raise it easily, grip the head re- FRONT ARMREST (fig. 24) REAR ARMREST (fig. 25) straint from the back. The armrest can be adjusted up or Lower the armrest to the position To bring it back to the original po- down. shown for use by lowering the lever on sition: press buttons A and lower the the armrest. To use the armrest, lower it as head restraint until it fits into the seat shown in the figure. To close, lift the armrest into its back. housing. An oddment compartment is con- cealed inside the armrest. Press but- ton A to lift the cover.

IMPORTANT When the armrest has been lifted completely, take care P4T0012 not to accidentally press button A, otherwise you will open the object tray cover and the contents will fall out.

fig. 22 P4T0735 P4T0808 P4T0014

fig. 23 fig. 24 fig. 25 31 On versions with single seat the rear STEERING WHEEL (fig. 27) INTERNAL REARVIEW MIRROR armrest is equipped with glass-tin The steering wheel height and axial holder (fig. 26). position can be adjusted. Manually adjustable (fig. 28) 1) Move lever A to position 1. This mirror can be adjusted in four directions by means of lever A: 2) Adjust the steering wheel (by pulling, pushing, lifting or lowering 1) normal position it). 2) anti-dazzle position. 3) Return the lever to position 2 to The mirror is also fitted with a safety lock the wheel in place. device that releases the mirror in the event of an impact. P4T0734 Automatically adjustable (where fitted-fig. 29) Only make adjustments This mirror is automatically set to when the car is stationary. day and night position. fig. 26 P4T0809 P4T0272 P4T0016

fig. 27 fig. 28 fig. 29 32 EXTERNAL REARVIEW The mirrors can be folded manually The mirrors are automatically demi- MIRRORS (fig. 30-31-32) or electrically (where fitted) to reduce sted/ defrosted when the heated rear side clearance. window is operated. These mirrors can only be adjusted when the ignition key is at MAR. Turn switch A (fig. 31) to position 3 IMPORTANT The curve of the mir- to fold the mirrors electrically (where ror surface makes objects seem fur- Turn switch A (fig. 30-31) to posi- fitted). Turn the switch to position 0 ther away than they actually are. tion 1 (left-hand mirror) or to posi- to return the mirrors to their normal tion 2 (right-hand mirror) to select position. Storing rearview mirror the mirror to be adjusted. positions (where fitted) Press switch A to adjust the mirror The external rearview mirror posi- in the four directions. tion is stored along with the driver’s After adjusting, turn switch A back If the mirrors make it dif- seat position in versions fitted with a to position 0 to prevent moving the ficult to get through nar- driver’s seat electrical adjustment and mirrors accidentally. row gaps and in automatic storing feature. car washes, fold them from posi- tion 1 to position 2 (fig. 32). P4T0056 P4T0029 P4T0017

fig. 30 fig. 31 fig. 32 33 SEAT BELTS The reel mechanism prevents the ADJUSTING THE HEIGHT OF webbing coming out when it is jerked THE SEAT BELTS (fig. 34) or if the car brakes sharply, is in a HOW TO USE collision or when cornering at high Always adjust the height of the front THE SEAT BELTS speed. seat belt to fit the person wearing it. (front and rear seats - fig. 33) This could greatly reduce the risk of injury in the case of collision. To fasten the seat belts, take the tongue of fastener A and push it into The belt is adjusted properly when buckle B, until you hear it click. the webbing passes approximately Never press button (C) halfway between the edge of the Pull the seat belt gently. If it jams, when travelling. shoulder and the neck. let it rewind a little and pull it out again without jerking. The seat belt can be adjusted to one For maximum safety, of five different heights. < Instrument panel warning light keep the back of your seat will come on if the ignition key is upright, lean back into it turned to MAR and the driver’s seat and make sure the seat belt fits belt is not fastened. closely across your chest and hips. Only adjust seat belt height when the car is sta- To release the seat belts, press tionary. button C. Guide the seat belt with your hand while is rewinding to pre- vent it from twisting. P4T0019 The seat belt reel mechanism en- P4T0018 sures that the belt automatically ad- justs to the wearer allowing him or her to move in complete freedom. When the car is parked on a steep slope the reel mechanism may block; this is normal. fig. 33 fig. 34 34 To raise the belt FRONT SEAT BELT LOAD USE OF THE REAR SEAT Lift loop A to the required position. LIMITING DEVICE BELTS In order to increase passive safety, The rear seat belts must be To lower the front seat belt reels have a built- worn as shown (fig. 35). in load limiting device which collapse B A You should put the belt on when you Press button and move loop in a controlled fashion so to dose the are sitting upright and leaning back downwards at the same time to the force on the passenger’s shoulder dur- in your seat. required position. ing retaining operation. When no-one is sitting in the rear seats, carefully fold the belts and buckles and stow them away in the receptacles in the seat back. After adjustment, always check that the slider is an- chored in one of the posi- tions provided. To do this, with the button released, exert a further pressure to allow the anchor de- vice to catch if release did not take place at one of the preset positions. P4T0703

fig. 35 35 Remember that in the Make sure the seat back GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR case of a violent collision, is correctly hooked on THE USE OF THE SEAT BELTS back seat passengers not both sides to prevent seat wearing seat belts also represent a back being thrown forwards and The driver is responsible for re- serious danger to the passengers in injuring passengers should you specting and enforcing the local rules the front. brake sharply. and laws regarding the use of seat belts.

Proper backrest coupling Make sure the seat belts is guaranteed when each of the front and rear pas- handle (B – fig. 35 / a) and sengers are fastened at all (C – fig. 35 / b), is retracted in its times. You increase the risk of se- housing. rious injury or death in a collision if you travel with the belts unfas- tened. P4T0205 P4T0206

fig. 35/a fig. 35/b 36 The webbing must not be Seat belts must also be worn by ex- Never travel with a child twisted. The upper section pectant mothers: the risk of injury in sitting on the passenger’s must pass across the the case of accident is much greater lap with a single belt to shoulder and chest diagonally. The for them and their unborn child too if protect them both (fig. 38). lower part must fit closely across they do not have a seat belt on. Of the passenger’s hips and not the course, they must position the lower abdomen, to prevent them from part of the belt very low down so that sliding forwards (fig. 36). Do not it passes under the abdomen (fig. 37). HOW TO KEEP THE SEAT use clips, fasteners etc. to prevent BELTS IN PROPER WORKING the belt adhering to the passenger’s ORDER AT ALL TIMES body. 1) When wearing the seat belts, al- ways ensure they are not twisted and

P4T0043 are free to wind in and out. 2) Following a serious accident, re- IMPORTANT Arrange the child re- place the belt being worn at the time, straint seat on the rear seat behind the even if it does not seem damaged. passenger’s seat. This is the most pro- tected position in the passenger com- 3) When cleaning the belts, wash partment in the event of a collision. them by hand with water and neutral soap, rinse them and let them dry in the shade. Do not use strong deter- fig. 37 gents, bleach, colourings or any other chemical substance that could weaken

P4T0042 P4T0044 the fibres. 4) Do not allow the reel mechanisms to get wet: they are only guaranteed to work properly if they remain dry.

fig. 36 fig. 38 37 CARRYING passenger’s air bag, which during For optimal protection in the event inflation could cause serious in- of a crash, all passengers must be CHILDREN jury, even mortal, regardless of the seated and wearing adequate restraint seriousness of the crash that trig- systems. SAFELY gered it. Children may be placed This is even more important for chil- on the front seat of cars fitted with

I R B A G dren. A SERIOUS DANGER: passenger’s air bag deactivation. Never place cradle In this case, it is absolutely neces- According to 2003/20/EC Directive, child’s seats on the sary to check the warning light F this prescription is compulsory for all front passenger seat of cars fitted on the cluster to make sure that European Community countries. with passenger air bag since the deactivation has actually taken Compared with adults, their head is air bag activation could cause se- place (see paragraph front and proportionally larger and heavier than rious injuries, even mortal. side air bags at item front passen- ger air bag). the rest of the body, while the muscles and bone structure are not completely You are advised to carry children developed. Therefore, correct restraint always on the rear seat, as this is The front passenger seat shall be systems are necessary, other then the most protected position in the adjusted in the most backward po- adult seat belts. case of a crash. In any case, chil- sition to prevent any contact be- dren's seats must absolutely not be tween child’s seat and dashboard. fitted on the front seat of car’s with P4T0234

fig. 39 38 The results of research on the best Lineaccessori Lancia offers seats for The figure is only an ex- child restraint systems are contained each weight group, which are the rec- ample for mounting. Attain in the European Standard ECE-R44. ommended choice, as they have been to the instructions for fas- This Standard enforces the use of re- designed and experimented specifi- tening which must be enclosed straint systems classified in five cally for Lancia cars. with the specific child restraint groups: system you are using . Group 0 0-10 kg in weight GROUP 0 and 0+ Group 0+ 0-13 kg in weight Babies up to 13 kg must be carried facing backwards on a cradle seat, Group 0 9-18 kg in weight which, supporting the head, does not Group 0 15-25 kg in weight induce stress on the neck in the event of sharp deceleration. GROUP 1 Group 0 22-36 kg in weight The cradle is restrained by the car Starting from 9 kg to 18 kg in As it may be noted, the groups over- seat belts, as shown in fig. 40 and in weight, children may be carried fac- lap partly and in fact, in commerce it turn it must restrain the child with its ing forwards, with seats fitted with is possible to find devices that cover own belts. front cushion (fig. 41), through which more than one weight group (fig. 39). the car seat belt restrains both child and seat. All restraint devices must bear the certification data, together with the control brand, on a solidly fixed label which must absolutely never be re- moved. P4T0238 P4T0237 Over 1.50 m in height, from the point of view of restraint systems, children are considered as adults and wear the seat belts normally.

fig. 40 fig. 41 39 The figure is indicative correctly in relation to the belts, so GROUP 3 for assembly only. The seat that the diagonal part adheres to the For children from 22 kg up to 36 kg should be installed follow- chest and not to the neck and that the the size of the child’s chest no longer ing the instructions that must ac- horizontal part clings to the child’s requires a support to space the child’s company it. pelvis and not the abdomen (fig. 42). back from the seat back. Fig. 43 shows proper child seat po- sitioning on the rear seat. Children taller than 1.50 m can wear seat belts like adults. Seats exist which are The figure is only an ex- suitable for covering ample for mounting. Attain weight groups 0 and 1 with to the instructions for fas- a rear connection to the vehicle tening which must be enclosed belts and their own belts to re- with the specific child restraint strain the child. Due to their size, system you are using. they can be dangerous if installed incorrectly fastened to the car belts with a cushion. Carefully follow the instructions for installation provided with the seat. P4T0236 P4T0235

GROUP 2 Starting from 15 kg to 25 kg in weight, children may be restrained di- rectly by the car belts. The only func- tion of the seat is to position the child fig. 42 fig. 43 40 Passenger seat compliance with regulations on child’s seat use Lancia Lybra complies with the new Directive 2000/3/EC regulating child’s seat assembling on the different car seats ac- cording to the following tables:

SEAT Group Range of weight Front Side Central passenger rear rear passenger passenger Group 0, 0+ fino a 13 kg U U U Group 1 9 - 18 kg U U U Group 2 15 - 25 kg U U U Group 3 22 - 36 kg U U U

Key: U = suitable for child restraint systems of the “Universal” category, according to European Standard ECE-R44 for the specified “Groups”

41 Below is a summary of the rules 5) Always check the seat belt is well PRETENSIONERS of safety to be followed for fastened by pulling the webbing. carrying children: 6) Only one child is to be strapped Your car is fitted with pretensioners 1) The recommended position for to each retaining system. on the front side seats to improve pro- installing children’s seat is on the rear tection. These devices are triggered by 7) Always check the seat belts do not a sensor in the event of a violent im- seat, as it is the most protected in the fit around the child’s throat. case of a crash. pact and pull back a few inches of 8) While travelling, do not let the webbing. In this way the pretensioner 2) In cars fitted with passenger air child sit incorrectly or release the ensures that the belt is adhering per- bag never place child’s restraint sys- belts. fectly to the body before the belt be- tems on the front seat since children gins to hold back the wearer. shall never be seated on the front pas- 9) Passengers should never carry senger seat. children on their laps. No-one, how- When the pretensioner has been ever strong they are, can hold a child triggered the retractor will lock. The 3) If the passenger’s air bag is deac- in the event of a crash. seat belt cannot be drawn back up tivated always check the warning even when guiding it manually. light F on the cluster to make sure 10) In case of an accident, replace that it has actually been deactivated. the seat with a new one. Some smoke may be produced when the pretensioner is triggered. The 4) Attain to the instructions for fas- smoke is harmless and does indicate tening the specific child restraint sys- the beginning of a fire. tem which you are using. These in- structions must be provided by the The pretensioners do not require any manufacturer. Keep the child re- maintenance or lubrication. Any mod- straint system installation instructions ification of their original state invali- with the car documents and this dates its efficiency. Handbook. Never use a child restraint system without installation instruc- tions.

42 If, as the result of exceptional nat- Under no circumstances FRONT AND SIDE ural occurrences (floods, sea storms should the components of etc.), the device is soaked through the pretensioner be tam- AIRBAGS with water and mud, it must be re- pered with or removed. Any inter- The car is equipped with front placed. ventions should be carried out by airbags for driver (fig. 45/a) and pas- qualified and authorised person- The pretensioner will give maximum senger (fig. 46), and with side airbags, nel. Always contact a Lancia Dealer- protection when the seat belt adheres side bags (fig. 47) and window bags ship. snugly to the wearer’s chest and hips. (fig. 48). The pretensioner can only be used once. After a Operations involving bang- collision that has triggered ing, vibrations or heating it, have it replaced at a Fiat Deal- (exceeding 100°C for a ership. The validity of the device is maximum of six hours) in the area written on the plate located in the around the pretensioner may trig- glove compartment. Contact Lan- ger or damage the device. Vibra- cia Dealership to have pretension- tions from rough road surfaces ers replaced as this date ap- or accidental jolting caused by proaches. mounting pavements etc. do not have any effect on the preten- sioner. If, however, you need any 07 2017 10 30 506 05 04 03 02 01

assistance, go to a Lancia Dealer- 12 11 10 09 08 PRETENSIONERS 2015 2018 P4T0814 P4T0810 ship. AIRBAG AND 2014 2019 CLOCK SPRING 08 09 10 11 12 01 02 03 04 05 06 2013 07

ATTENZIONE:

CAUTION:

ATTENTION:

ACHTUNG: fig. 45 fig. 45/a 43 FRONT AIRBAGS The front Air bag consists of an in- The front airbag (driver and pas- stantly inflatable bag housed in a spe- senger) is a device which protects the Description and operation cial compartment located: occupants of the car during a head-on The front airbag (driver and pas- collision of a medium-high degree by senger) is a safety device which is im- – in the centre of the steering wheel on the driver’s side; placing a soft bag between the pas- mediately triggered in the event of a senger and the steering wheel or the front impact. – in the dashboard on the passen- dashboard. ger’s side (larger bag). In a collision, an electronic control unit processes the signals from a de- Please don’t apply stick- celeration sensor and, where required, ers or other objects to the inflates the airbag. steering wheel, to the air- The bag inflates instantly and acts bag cover on the passenger's side P4T0705 as a soft protective barrier between or on the side roof lining to the up- the front seat passengers and the holstery on the roof side. Don’t structures in front of them that could place objects on the dashboard cause injury. The bags deflates im- passenger’s side (such as mobile mediately afterwards. phones) because they could tam- per with the correct opening of the passenger’s air-bag and than cause serious injuries to the vehi- fig. 46 cle occupants. P4T0707 P4T0706

fig. 48 fig. 47 44 R B A A passenger not wearing For impacts against very deformable A I G SEVERE DANGER: the seat belt may crash or mobile objects (traffic sign poles, If the car has a into the bag before it is heaps of gravel or snow, parked vehi- passenger’s airbag, fully inflated. In this case, the pro- cles), rear impacts (e.g. a car crash- do not place the child restraint seat tection is considerably decreased. ing into the back), side impacts, wedg- on the front seat. If required, always The airbag, as a consequence, is ing under other vehicles or barriers deactivate the passenger’s front not a replacement for the use of (e.g. under a truck or guard rail), the airbag when a child seat is placed on seat belts but rather a comple- airbag does not offer additional pro- the front seat. Although it may not be ment. We recommend that seat tection with respect to the seat belts prescribed by law, we recommend belts are worn at all times as pre- and may even be undesirable. reactivating the airbag as soon as it scribed by legislation in Europe The fact that the airbag is not trig- is no longer necessary to carry chil- and most other countries world- gered in these situations, this does not dren to provide better protection to wide. signify a malfunction. adult passengers. In the event of front collisions at low speed, the restraining action of the PASSENGER’S FRONT AIRBAG seat belts is sufficient and the airbag is not inflated. The passenger’s airbag was designed and calibrated to protect a person wearing seat belts. When fully inflated, the bag will fill most of the space between the dash- F board and the passenger. Warning light indi- cates also warning light ¬ failure. This is indicated by intermittent flashing, over 4 seconds, of warning light F. In this event, warning light ¬ could be not up to indicate restraint sys- tem failures, if any. Stop the car and contact Lancia Dealership to have the system checked.

45 Manually deactivating the Only turn the switch when The side airbag will work although passenger’s front airbag (fig. 49) the engine is not running the front airbag is deactivated. and the ignition key is re- The passenger’s front airbag can be The key can be inserted and re- moved. deactivated if it is absolutely neces- moved from the switch with the door sary to carry a child in the front pas- open in any of the two positions. senger seat. The airbag is deactivated with the The key switch (fig. 49) has two ignition key by means of the switch on possible positions: the right-hand side of the dashboard 1) Passenger’s front airbag active: (fig. 46). The switch can only be (position ON P) instrument panel reached when the door is open. warning light off. Do not carry chil- dren on the front seat. 2) Passenger’s front airbag deacti- vated: (position OFF F) instrument The passenger’s front panel warning light on. A child may airbag deactivated warn- be carried on the front seat, protected ing light will signal with a specific restraint system. airbag warning light¬ faults. In this case, the situation on the in- The F warning light on the instru- strument panel is: ment panel will stay on until the pas- ¬ senger front airbag is reactivated. – airbag warning light off; – passenger front airbag deacti- P4T0264 vated warning light flashing (past the normal four seconds). Stop the car and contact Lancia Dealership to have the system checked. fig. 49 46 SIDE AIRBAGS In the event of a side collision the IMPORTANT The front and/or side (SIDE BAG – WINDOW BAG) electronic control unit processes the airbags can be triggered if the car is signals coming from a deceleration involved in hard impacts or collisions Purpose of the side airbags is to in- sensor and, if required, fires the bags. in the area of the underbody, e.g.: vi- crease passenger protection in the olent impacts against steps, kerbs or event of a side impact of medium to The bag inflates instantly and acts projecting objects fixed to the ground, high severity. as a soft protective barrier between the body of the front seat passengers or if the car falls into large pot-holes Side airbags consist of an instantly and the car door. The bag deflates im- or dips in the road surface. inflatable bag: mediately afterwards. - the side bag is housed in the front In the event of side collisions at low seat backs. This solution ensures that IMPORTANT When the airbag is speed, the restraining action of the the bag is always in an optimal posi- fired it emits a small amount of pow- seat belts is sufficient and the airbag tion with respect to the passenger, re- ders and smoke. This is not harmful is not inflated. gardless of the seat position; and does not indicate the beginning of The airbag, as a consequence, is not a fire. Furthermore the surface of the - since the window bag is a “win- a replacement for the use of seat belts inflated bag and the passenger com- dow” system it is housed in the roof but rather a complement. We recom- partment may be covered with pow- side covering, masked with a proper mend that seat belts are worn at all dery residues. This powder may irri- finishing that enables bag deflation times as prescribed by legislation in tate skin and eyes. In the event of ex- downwards. This solution has been Europe and most other countries posure, wash with mild soap and wa- studied for protecting the head and world-wide. ter. therefore to offer the best passenger protection in the event of a side im- Side airbags are not deactivated by pact. The “window” solution offers front airbag switch operation, as de- the aforesaid top protection perfor- scribed in the previous paragraph and mance through the wide deflation sur- therefore in the event of side impact, face and the self-supporting charac- protection is guaranteed also to any teristics, the same type of protection child carried on the front passenger is also offered to rear seat passengers. seat.

47 The air bag system has a validity of If the car changes hands, the new When the ignition key is 14 years as to the pyrotechnic charge, owner must be made aware of the in- turned to MAR (passenger and 10 years as to the twisted contact. dications given above and be given front airbag deactivation As this date approaches, contact Lan- this “Owner Handbook”. switch at ON), the warning light cia Dealership to have it replaced. will come on for approximately IMPORTANT Pretensioners, front four seconds and flash for other airbags and side airbags are activated four seconds to remind the driver by the electronic control unit accord- IMPORTANT After an accident that the passenger’s front and side ing to the type of impact. Conse- which triggered the airbags, go to a airbags will be fired in the event of quently, missed activation of one or Lancia Dealership to have the en- a crash. The warning light should more system components does not in- tire safety system, the electronic con- go out immediately afterwards. dicate a fault in the system. trol unit, the seat belts and the pre- tensioners replaced and to have the electrical system checked. Any diagnostic, repair or replace- ment operations concerning the airbag system must exclusively be GENERAL NOTES carried out at a Lancia Dealership. If you are having the car scrapped, If the ¬ warning light If an attempt has been have the airbag system deactivated at does not turn on when made to steal the car, or if a Lancia Dealership first. turning the ignition key to it has actually been stolen MAR or if it stays on when travel- or has been vandalised in any way ling, this could indicate a failure or subjected to flooding, have the in safety retaining systems; under airbag system checked over at a this condition air bags or preten- Lancia Dealership. sioners could not trigger in the event of collision or, in a restricted number of cases, they could trig- ger accidentally. Stop the car and contact Lancia Dealership to have the system checked immediately.

48 Do not apply stickers or It is important to remem- Do not cover back rest of other objects to the steer- ber that the airbag can be front seats with trims or ing wheel, to the passen- fired even when the car is covers there are not set for ger’s airbag cover or to the side stationary if it is hit by another ve- the use of side bags. airbag covers. hicle travelling at suitable speed. As a consequence, hever sit children in the front seat, even if the car is not moving. On the contrary, the airbags The airbag does not re- Do not travel with objects will not be fired if the car is crashed place seat belts but rather on your lap or in front of into when the key is not inserted or increases their effective- you nor with a pipe, pencil turned. Consequently, in this case, ness. Furthermore, the airbag is not or similar between your lips; you the fact that the system is not fired fired in the event of low speed front could seriously hurt yourself if the does not indicate a fault. collisions, side collisions, rear-end airbag inflates in a collision. shunts and roll-overs. In these cases, the passengers are only pro- tected by the seat belts which for this reason must always be fastened.

Always drive with both hands on the rim of the steering wheel so that the airbag is free to inflate during a The airbag is set to be head-on collision and protect you fired in the event of colli- from serious injury. Do not drive sions which are greater with your body bending towards Do not wash the seat than the pretensioner settings. the steering wheel, but sit in an up- back in cars with side Consequently, for collisions in the right position with your back rest- airbags with pressurised bracket between the two thresh- ing against the seat. steam or water in automatic seat olds, it is normal for only the pre- washing stations. tensioners to be fired.

49 INSTRUMENT PANEL PETROL VERSIONS

fig. 50 P4T0733

DIESEL VERSIONS

fig. 51 P4T0635 A Engine coolant temperature gauge with overheating warning light - B Speedometer - C Kilometre counter (and trip me- ter) - D Engine rev counter - E Fuel gauge and reserve warning light - F Warning lights - G Trip meter reset button.

50 INSTRUMENTS IMPORTANT The speedometer control compressor or fans, etc. In may present different full scale values particular, a gradual variation in en- according to the versions. gine revolution speed safeguards bat- IMPORTANT After stopping the tery charge. engine (turning the key to STOP), the REV COUNTER (fig. 53-54) speedometer and the rev counter are IMPORTANT The hazard sectors re-calibrated for approximately one If the needle is in the hazard sector can present different widths and dif- second. During this time, the speedome- (the section with the progressively ferent full scale values according to ter and rev counter needles will hover closer lines) it shows your car’s engine the various car versions. and a slight ticking sound may be is over-revving. Do not travel with the heard. needle in this sector. IMPORTANT The electronic injec- tion control system will progressively When the engine is idling, the rev cut off the flow of fuel when the en- SPEEDOMETER (fig. 52) counter may show a gradual or sud- gine is over-revving and the engine The speedometer shows the car den increase in engine speed, accord- will consequently lose power. speed expressed in kilometres per ing to the case. This is normal and in- hour (km/h). dicates the operation of the climate P4T0636 P4T0637 P4T0638

fig. 52 fig. 53 - petrol versions fig. 54 - diesel versions 51 ENGINE COOLANT The warning light will come on to FUEL GAUGE AND RESERVE TEMPERATURE GAUGE WITH indicate that the coolant temperature WARNING LIGHT (fig. 56) is too hot. In this case, stop the engine OVERHEATING WARNING The fuel reserve warning light will LIGHT (fig. 55) immediately and contact a Lancia Dealership. come on to indicate that there are ap- This instrument indicates the engine proximately eight litres of fuel in the coolant temperature. It starts sig- IMPORTANT The needle may ap- tank. nalling the temperature when this proach the top scale values if the en- Do not travel with the fuel tank al- reaches approximately 50°C. gine cooling radiator external part is most empty: the gaps in fuel delivery The needle should usually be on obstructed or dirty. could damage the catalyser. middle scale values. Reduce your de- mand on the engine if the needle ap- In this case, inspect and remove the proaches top scale values. obstructions. Accurately clean the ex- ternal part of the radiator as soon as possible. P4T0051 P4T0052

fig. 55 fig. 56 52 KILOMETRE COUNTER Press button B (fig. 58) for at least WARNING LIGHTS (AND TRIP METER) (fig. 57-58) one second seconds to reset the trip meter. The following information is shown The warning lights come on in the following circumstances: on display (fig. 57): IMPORTANT The trip meter read- – the total number of kilometres dri- ing will be deleted if the battery is dis- LEFT-HAND ven (six digits) on the first line connected. Ÿ DIRECTION – the trip meter reading (four digits) INDICATORS on the second line. (flashing) (green) When the direction indicator stalk is pushed down and when the hazard lights are on (along with the right- hand direction indicator warning light).

RIGHT-HAND Δ DIRECTION INDICATORS (flashing) (green)

P4T0639 P4T0020 When the direction indicator stalk is pulled up and when the hazard lights are on (along with the left-hand di- rection indicator warning light).

fig. 57 fig. 58 53 TRAILER DIRECTION When the outside temperature is LOW ENGINE OIL l INDICATORS (green) high, the warning light may come on v PRESSURE (red) for a moment only. Contact a Lancia When the engine oil pres- Dealership for connections sure falls below the normal level. When electrically connected to a MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS (blue) The warning light should come on trailer and the director indicator stalk 1 when the ignition key is turned to or the hazard light switch is operated. When the main beam head- MAR and should go out as soon as lights are switched on. the engine starts. A delay in the light going out is ac- GLOW PLUGS (amber) ceptable only when the engine is idling. m (jtd versions - amber) OUTSIDE LIGHTS When the ignition key is 3 (green) If the engine has been taxed heavily, the light may flash when idling. It turned to MAR. The light will go out When the side/taillights should, however, go out when you ac- when the glow plugs reach the pre- are switched on or the ignition key is celerate slightly. scribed temperature. turned to PARK. Start the engine as soon as the warn- ing light goes out. If the warning light If after starting the engine, the comes on when the car is warning light flashes for approxi- BATTERY NOT w RECHARGING running, stop the engine mately 30 seconds, you can run the and contact a Lancia Dealership. engine but you should contact a Lan- PROPERLY (red) cia Dealership as soon as possible to When there is a fault in the current have the problem solved. generating system. The warning light should come on SEAT BELTS (red) when the ignition key is turned to MAR and should go out as soon as < When the driver’s seat belt the engine starts. is not fastened correctly.

54 FRONT BRAKE PADS Fixed light - warning of a fuel Contact a Lancia Dealer- d WORN (red) feed/ignition/injection system failure ship as soon as possible if which may increase emissions in ex- the U warning light either When the front brake haust or cause possible drops in per- does not come on when the key is pads are worn. Have them replaced as formance, poor handling and high turned to MAR or comes on, with soon as possible. consumption. fixed or flashing light, when trav- elling. IMPORTANT The car is equipped In such conditions, you can continue with front brake pad wear sensors driving but you should not tax the en- AIRBAG FAILURE (red) only. Have the rear brake pads gine and you should moderate the ¬ checked when the front pads are re- speed. Prolonged use with the warn- The warning light should placed. ing light on can cause damage. Con- come on when the ignition tact a Lancia Dealership as soon as key is turned to MAR and should go possible. out after approximately four seconds. The warning light will go out when The warning light will come on per- EOBD SYSTEM ENGINE the failure disappears. In any case, manently when there is an airbag sys- U CONTROL SYSTEM the system will store the error. tem failure. (amber) (in compliance with directive Flashing light - warning that the catalyser can be damaged (see 98/69/CE-EURO3) “EOBD system” in this chapter). If the warning light does In normal conditions, the warning not turn on when turning If the warning light starts flashing, light will come on when the ignition the ignition key to MAR or release the accelerator pedal and slow key is turned to MAR and should go if it stays on when travelling, this the engine down until the warning out as soon as the engine is started. could indicate a failure in safety light stops flashing. Continue driving The initial lighting up shows that the retaining systems; under this con- at moderate speed, preventing the warning light is working properly. dition air bags or pretensioners warning light from coming on again. could not trigger in the event of Warning light either stays on or Contact a Lancia Dealership as collision or, in a restricted number comes on while travelling: soon as possible. of cases, they could trigger acci- dentally. Stop the car and contact Lancia Dealership to have the sys- tem checked immediately. 55 ABS (ANTI-LOCK BRAK- LOW HANDBRAKE WATER IN DIESEL > ING SYSTEM) FAILURE x BRAKE FLUID c FUEL FILTER (amber) AND/OR HANDBRAKE (amber) - (jtd versions) ENGAGED (red) The warning light should come on Lights up when there is water in the The warning light should come on when the ignition key is turned to diesel fuel filter. when the ignition key is turned to MAR and should go out after ap- MAR and should go out after ap- proximately four seconds. proximately four seconds. The warning light comes on when The warning light will come on af- there is a failure in the ABS system. ter the check phase when the brake In this case, the normal braking sys- fluid level in the reservoir drops un- tem continues to work although with- der the minimum level due to a pos- out the ABS assistance but you should sible leakage in the system or when have the car seen to at a Lancia the handbrake is engaged. Dealership as soon as possible. The presence of water in The car is fitted with an the fuel feed circuit can se- electronic braking device verely damage the injec- (EBD). The> and x If the x warning light tion system and make the engine warning lights come on at the comes on when travelling, misfire. Go to a Lancia Dealership same time when the engine is run- check whether the hand- as soon as possible when the c ning to indicate that there is an brake is engaged. If the warning warning light comes on to have the EBD system failure. In this case vi- light stays on and the handbrake bleeding operation carried out. olent braking may be accompa- is not engaged, stop immediately nied by early rear wheel locking and contact a Lancia Dealership. with the possibility of skidding. Drive the car extremely carefully to the nearest Lancia Dealership to have the system checked.

56 ¢ LANCIA CODE (amber) PASSENGER’S FRONT ESP (amber) In three cases (with the F AIRBAG DEACTIVATED á (where required) key at MAR): (where fitted - amber) By turning the key to MAR 1. One flash - the key code has been The warning light will come on position, the warning lamp on the recognised. The engine can be started. when the passenger front airbag is de- dashboard will light up and go out af- activated. ter about 4 seconds. 2. Fixed light - the key code was not recognised. Carry out the emer- If the warning lamp does not go out gency start-up procedure to start the or stays on when the vehicle is run- engine (see “In an emergency”). ning, contact your Lancia Dealer- ship. 3. Flashing light - the car is not Warning light F indi- protected by the device. The engine cates also warning light ¬ The flashing of the warning lamp however can be started. failure. This is indicated when the vehicle is running indicates by intermittent flashing, over 4 the actuation of the ESP system seconds, of warning light F. In and/or the ASR function. this event, warning light ¬could The simultaneous lighting up of be not up to indicate restraint sys- warning lamp á on the dashboard tem failures, if any. Stop the car and of the LED on the switch indicate and contact Lancia Dealership to ASR function malfunction. In this have the system checked. case, contact your Lancia Dealer- CRUISE CONTROL ship. CRUISE (where fitted - amber) The warning light comes on when the switch on the cruise con- trol stalk is turned to ON when the device starts governing the engine. CHECK CONTROL (red) CHECK When a fault is found by the check control system.

57 The ESP system operates For correct operation of HILL HOLDER even when the undersized the ESP system the tyres * (amber) spare wheel is used. How- must absolutely be of the (where required) ever, it should be kept in mind same brand and type on all By turning the key to MAR position, that the undersized spare wheel is wheels, in perfect conditions and, the warning lamp on the dashboard smaller than the other wheels and, above all, of the specified type, will light up and go out after about 4 therefore, its grip on the roadbed brand and size. seconds. is reduced. Therefore, warning lamp á ESP might light up under If the warning lamp does not go out particular adhesion conditions or stays on when the vehicle is run- and/or driving manoeuvres; verify ning, contact your Lancia Dealership. that the lamp goes out when the ordinary wheel is fitted. When the undersized spare wheel is fitted to the vehicle, do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h and avoid manoeuvres that might cause the vehicle to go out of control.

58 CHECK CONTROL For details on warning light operation, the ICS system is off and standing by. see “Warning lights” in this chapter. The corresponding symbol will ap- (fig. 59) The faults and warnings which are pear on the last selected screen. The check control function is man- displayed by the check control func- 1 - External light fuse/system/bulb aged by the instrument panel. The tion are shown on the screen regard- failure warning light less of the operative status of the ICS. function informs the driver of faults 2 - Rear fog light bulb failure warn- or warnings by displaying warning The display will light up if the check ing light lights and messages on the ICS dis- control (only versions with Lancia play. I.C.S. system with navigator - where 3 - Left-hand brake light bulb fail- fitted) function sends a message when ure warning light P4T0640

fig. 59 59 4 - Right-hand brake light bulb ail- 16 - Engine oil level gauge (diesel WARNING MESSAGES ure warning light versions only). When the engine is started and a fault 5 - Brake light bulb failure warning The check control function can dis- is found, the following messages will light play two warning lights at the same appear on the display (for approxi- 6 - Low engine coolant level warn- time, side by side in addition to warn- mately five seconds) before the warn- ing light (where fitted) ing light 9 (open door or boot/tailgate). ing lights 1-10-11-12-13 come on: 7 - Low windscreen washer fluid If there are more than two warnings, – LIGHT FAILURE (warning light 1) level warning light (where fitted) the respective warning lights will be – ABS LED KO (warning light 10) 8 - Low engine oil level warning cyclically displayed every two sec- – EBD LED KO (warning light 11) light (diesel versions only) onds. The red CHECK message will 9 - Open door or boot/tailgate warn- appear in the right-hand part of the – LED ESP KO (warning light 12) CHECK ing light display. The red message – MISSING CHECK AND TRIP will also appear if the external light > COMPUTER SIGNAL (warning light 10 - Instrument panel warning bulb failure warning light 1 comes on. light failure warning light 13) The external light bulb failure warn- 11 - Instrument panel > and x ing light 1 will always come on in the OPEN DOOR OR warning light failure warning light event of a rear fog light bulb, left- (the simultaneous lighting up of BOOT/TAILGATE WARNING hand brake light bulb or right-hand these two warning lights indicates an LIGHT (9-14-15) brake light bulb failure along with the EBD electronic brake force distribu- respective warning lights (2-3-4-5). Icon 14 (saloon cars) or 15 (station tor failure) wagons) will be displayed in the á 12 - Instrument panel warning IMPORTANT The warning lights right-hand part of the main menu light failure warning light will continue to be displayed also display while warning light 9 will ap- 13 - Check control failure warning when a different screen or display pear in the lower left-hand part when light function is selected until the problem the key is turned to MAR. 14 - Open door or boot icon (saloon which caused the warning is removed. If the door or boot/tailgate is left car versions) The warning lights 1-8-10-11-12-13 open, icon 14 or 15 will disappear af- have priority over the other check ter approximately one minute while 15 - Open door or tailgate icon (Sta- control function information. tion Wagon versions) warning light 9 will stay on.

60 Warning light 9 only will appear in – oil level corresponding to the WARNING LIGHT LED AND the lower left-hand part of the display safety level: first bar on the left red or LANCIA I.C.S. CONTROL LED to signal that a door or the boot/tail- white, according to the versions, sec- (fig. 60 - where fitted) gate is open when the system is dis- ond bar white, other bars empty. playing another function. Red LED A: this LED lights up for – oil at minimum level: first bar on approximately four seconds when the The car icon 14 or 15 will appear the left red or white, according to the key is turned to MAR while the check again in the right-hand part of the versions, other bars empty. control function is running. Any faults display (as described above) when the If the level is low or insufficient (0 will be signalled by the respective main menu is selected again. or 1 bar displayed), warning light 8 warning lights and by the CHECK will come on. The warning light will warning light. The LED will go out after approximately ten seconds. LOW ENGINE OIL LEVEL be displayed also when other screens WARNING LIGHT AND GAUGE or functions are selected. Green LED B: this LED is used for (8-16) (jtd versions only) Icon 16 will flash for approximately lighting the Lancia ICS controls at night. It will light up when the key is The engine oil level will appear on five seconds and warning light 8 will come on to indicate an oil level sensor turned to MAR (approximately two the main screen for approximately ten seconds after the red LED A). seconds after the J screen when the failure. key is turned to MAR. In all conditions (low oil level or The engine oil level is displayed only faulty sensor), the red CHECK mes- when it is under the minimum safety sage will appear for several seconds in level. the right-hand part of the display. IMPORTANT The low engine oil

IMPORTANT The system checks P4T0283 the oil level only when the engine is level warning light 8 has priority over started if at least 20 minutes have the other check control function in- past since the engine was stopped. formation. The oil level is displayed by means of six bars. There are two values and two display modalities:

fig. 60 61 LANCIA ICS WITH MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (version without NAVIGATION SYSTEM) – Analogue/digital clock – Trip computer – Check control function (*) (*) Refer to the specific paragraphs for description and operation.

CONTROLS 1) Sound system/tape player/CD player (where fitted) buttons 2) - ICS and sound system on/off knob, for adjusting volume and audio settings 3) ICS function selection and con- firmation knob 4) Sound system settings display button 5) Language, clock functions and fig. 61 P4T0708 speed limit button The Lancia ICS (Integrated Control The multifunctional display controls 6) Trip computer functions button System) features a multifunctional 5” the following functions: 7) Display brightness button LCD which is directed so that it can – Sound system with tape player also be read by the passenger. and CD player (where fitted) (*)

62 SWITCHING THE ICS ADJUSTING THE DISPLAY MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY ON AND OFF BRIGHTNESS The display will show the LANCIA The ICS is switched on automati- The display may employ several trademark for approximately four cally when the engine is started (i.e. minutes to reach the set brightness seconds when it is switched on. This when the key is turned to MAR) and according to the temperature. will be followed by two different con- switched off when the key is turned to figurations (fig. 62-63) according to Keep button LIGHT 7 pressed (re- STOP. the ICS operative conditions. gardless of whether the outside lights Press knob 2 (fig. 61) with the igni- are on or off) to adjust the display The screen is usually split into four tion key off or extracted to operate brightness. The brightness will be ad- areas containing the following infor- the sound system only. The sound justed progressively from minimum to mation (fig. 62): system will automatically be switched maximum and from maximum to min- A – Data related to the sound sys- off after approximately 20 minutes. imum in approximately two seconds. tem/CD player (where fitted) and to Minimum and maximum brightness the engine oil level (diesel versions conditions will be held for approxi- only). mately one second. B – Analogue clock and warning IMPORTANT The display will be lights. illegible when set to minimum bright- ness. The display will automatically be dimmed when the outside lights are

switched on. The buttons will be set D P4T0627 according to the brightness of the A other instruments. The last set brightness will be auto- matically restored whenever the en- gine is started, regardless of whether the outside lights are on or off. B C

fig. 62 63 C – Date, digital clock and various The message SPEED LIMIT EX- The message MISSING CHECK warning messages. CEEDED will appear in area B when AND TRIP COMPUTER SIGNAL the set speed limit is exceeded. will appear if a fault in the connection D – Car icon with open door/boot/ between instrument panel and ICS tailgate warning lights, trip computer The date, the digital clock (when the occurs. In this case, go to a Lancia functions, SETUP functions, sound analogue clock is not displayed to make Dealership. system functions and EXP functions. room for the warning lights) and the warning messages (ABS LED KO, A screen split into three main areas The sound system information will EBD LED KO, and LIGHT FAIL- (fig. 63) and featuring a RETURN appear in area A only when the sound URE) will be shown in area C. These function ( ) will appear when either system is on. The message RADIO messages will be displayed for ap- the HELP RADIO, SETUP or TRIP OFF will appear when the sound sys- proximately five seconds when the button is pressed. The following in- tem is not on. The following informa- system is switched on and will then be formation will be provided: tion is provided when the CD player replaced by the respective warning is on (where fitted): E - Press the HELP RADIO 4 but- lights in area B. ton. The sound system operating con- – the selected CD number (from 1 The car icon with the open door/ ditions are shown: VOLUME, BASS, to 6) boot/tailgate warning lights, the trip TREBLE, BALANCE, FADER, STA- – the selected track computer functions, the SETUP func- TION 1-2-3-4-5-6, FM 1-2-3. LW, tions, the sound system functions and MW. – the duration of the selected track. the EXP function is shown in area D. The engine oil level (diesel versions only) will not appear if it is over the

minimum safety level. P4T0603 The analogue clock will not be dis- played in area B if any warning lights are on. The time will be displayed on E the digital clock in area C.

F G fig. 63 64 Press the SETUP button 5. The fol- DISPLAY SETTINGS (fig. 64) – SUMMER SAVING TIME ON/ lowing selectable options will be OFF Press the button SETUP 5 (fig. 61) shown: SPEED LIMIT, SET TIME, with the key at MAR. A screen with – ITALIANO SET DATE, ALARM, TYRE PRES- the following functions will appear af- SURE (these values cannot be edited), – ENGLISH ter the LANCIA trademark screen: LANGUAGE 1-2-3-4-5, SUMMER – FRANCAIS SAVING TIME ON-OFF. – SPEED LIMIT – DEUTSCH Press the TRIP button 6. The fol- – SET TIME lowing information will be shown: – ESPANOL. RANGE, AVG CONSUMPTION, – SET DATE Select RETURN ( ) after adjust- TRAV DISTANCE (kilometres dri- – ALARM (set) and ON/OFF ven since last reset), AVERAGE ing the settings by turning knob 3 SPEED, TIME ELAPSED. – TYRES (the prescribed tyre infla- (fig. 61) and pressing to confirm. tion pressure) This will take you back to the main F – Digital clock (when no warning menu. lights are displayed) and warning lights (when there is a fault). G – Sound system and CD player data (when the sound system is on) or the message RADIO OFF (when the sound system is off). The RETURN function (represented P4T0604 by the symbol in some screens) will either take you back to the ICS main menu (fig. 61) or to the previ- ous page of a menu from a sub-menu page. The symbol (RETURN) in some screens will turn white when it is se- lected. fig. 64 65 Setting the clock Select field B (minutes) by turning Setting the date 3 and pressing it to confirm. Select the SET TIME function (fig. 64) Select the SET DATE function (fig. 64) by turning knob 3 (fig. 61) and press Then turn knob 3 clockwise to in- by turning knob 3 (fig. 61) and press the knob to confirm. A screen with crease the minutes and anticlockwise the knob to confirm. A screen with the following fields will appear on the to decrease them. Press knob 3 when the following fields will appear on the display (fig. 65): the required time is shown to confirm. display (fig. 66): – Hours A Select RETURN C after adjusting – Day A the settings by turning knob 3 and – Minutes B – Month B pressing to confirm. This will take you – RETURN C. back to the SETUP menu (fig. 64). – Year C Select field A (hours) by turning The digital clock will be automati- – RETURN D. knob 3 and pressing it to confirm. cally adjusted with the analogue clock. Then turn knob 3 clockwise to in- crease the hours and anticlockwise to decrease them. Press knob 3 when the Switching the summer saving required time is shown to confirm. time on and off The SUMMER SAVING TIME ON/OFF function allows to switch to summer saving time and back with- out changing the clock settings. P4T0605 Select SUMMER SAVING TIME ON P4T0606 ( ✓ ) to forward the clock by one hour A B and SUMMER SAVING TIME OFF A B C ( ) to go back by one hour. Select ON or OFF ( ✓ / ) by means of knob 3 and press it to confirm. C D fig. 65 fig. 66 66 Select field A (day) by turning knob Switch the alarm function on Select field A (hours) by turning 3 and pressing it to confirm. and off knob 3 and pressing it to confirm. Then turn knob 3 clockwise to in- Select the ALARM function (fig. 64) Then turn knob 3 clockwise to in- crease the days (from 1 to 31) and by turning knob 3 (fig. 61) and press crease the hours and anticlockwise to anticlockwise to decrease them (from the knob to confirm. A screen with decrease them. Press knob 3 when the 31 to 1). Press knob 3 when the re- the following fields will appear on the required time is shown to confirm. quired day is shown to confirm. display (fig. 67): Select field B (minutes) by turning Select field B (month) by turning – Hours A 3 and pressing it to confirm. knob 3 and pressing it to confirm. – Minutes B Then turn knob 3 clockwise to in- Then turn knob 3 clockwise to in- crease the minutes and anticlockwise crease the months (from 1 to 12) and – RETURN C. to decrease them. Press knob 3 when anticlockwise to decrease them (from the required time is shown to confirm. 12 to 1). Press knob 3 when the re- Select RETURN C after adjusting quired month is shown to confirm. the settings by turning knob 3 and Select field C (year) by turning knob pressing to confirm. This will take you 3 and pressing it to confirm. back to the SETUP menu (fig. 65). Then turn knob 3 clockwise to in- crease the years and anticlockwise to decrease them. Press knob 3 when the required year is shown to confirm. P4T0607 Select RETURN D after adjusting the settings by turning knob 3 and press- A B ing to confirm. This will take you back to the SETUP menu (fig. 64).

C

fig. 67 67 Select ON or OFF by turning the Speed limit Then turn knob 3 clockwise to in- knob 3 to switch the function on and crease the speed and anticlockwise to The SPEED LIMIT functions in- off. decrease it. Press knob 3 when the re- forms the driver with a visual and/or quired speed is shown to confirm. The message ON will appear on the acoustic warning whenever the set main menu when the alarm function speed limit is exceeded. Select field B ON or OFF to switch is on. the SPEED LIMIT function on or off Turn knob 3 (fig. 61) to select the as required and press knob 3 to con- A buzzer will ring at the set time for function and press the knob to con- firm. approximately 12 seconds also if the firm. ignition key is removed. Select field C ON or OFF to switch A screen with the following fields the buzzer on or off as required and will appear on the display (fig. 68): Selecting the language press knob 3 to confirm. – Set speed limit in km/h A Select the language by means of The system will provide the follow- knob 3 (fig. 61) and press the knob – Set speed limit warning on/off B ing warnings when the SPEED LIMIT function is on and the set to confirm. C – Buzzer on/off speed is exceeded: The available languages are ITAL- – RETURN D. IAN, ENGLISH, FRENCH, GER- – the buzzer (if the respective func- MAN, SPANISH. Select field A (set speed) by turning tion C is on) will sound for approxi- knob 3 and pressing it to confirm. mately four seconds if the speed does not drop to at least 5 km/h under the limit;

P4T0608 – the SPEED LIMIT function will be A displayed instead of the main menu B (fig. 68) to allow to change the set value or switch the buzzer and func- tion on or off. C D

fig. 68 68 – the message SPEED LIMIT EX- Tyre inflation pressure – TIME ELAPSED (since the last CEEDED will appear on the display; start-up or reset) Select the TYRE function by turn- – the sound system (if on) will be ing knob 3 (fig. 61) and press the – KEY/TRIP muted (MUTE function). knob to confirm. The prescribed tyre – TRIP RESET. inflation pressure according to the The message SPEED LIMIT EX- load will be displayed. If the TRIP function is on (manual CEEDED will remain on the display data resetting), you can reset data by until the speed drops to at least 5 IMPORTANT This function pro- selecting and confirming the TRIP km/h under the speed limit or until vides the prescribed value and not the RESET field in the function screens. the SPEED LIMIT function is actual tyre inflation pressure. Check switched off. At the end of the settings, either the tyre inflation pressure on a regu- press TRIP 6 again (fig. 61) to go Select RETURN D after adjusting lar basis. back to the main menu, or HELP the settings by turning knob 3 and RADIO 4 to go to the sound system pressing to confirm. This will take you TRIP COMPUTER (fig. 69) functions screen, or SETUP 5 to go to back to the SETUP menu (fig. 64). Press the TRIP button 6 (fig. 61) the display setting screen. with the key at MAR. A screen with the following functions will appear af- ter the LANCIA trademark screen: – RANGE – AVG CONSUMPTION (TRIP

MODE) P4T0628 – FLASH CONSUMPTION (KEY MODE) – TRAV DISTANCE (kilometres driven since last reset) – AVERAGE SPEED

fig. 69 69 IMPORTANT When the engine is Select RETURN after adjusting the Select RETURN by turning knob 3 started (i.e. the key is turned to MAR) settings by turning knob 3 (fig. 61) and (fig. 61) and pressing to confirm. the trip computer processes the data pressing to confirm. This will take you This will take you back to the trip required for the various functions. back to the main menu (fig. 69). computer main menu (fig. 69). During this phase, the range, con- sumption, etc. values are not dis- Average consumption Instant consumption (visible played for approximately 30 seconds. (visible with the TRIP with the KEY function on) function on) (fig. 71) Selecting and confirming the IN- Range (fig. 70) Select the AVG CONSUMPTION STANT CONSUMPTION function, Select the RANGE function by turn- function by turning knob 3 (fig. 61) the display will show the vehicle fuel ing knob 3 (fig. 61) and press the and press the knob to confirm. The consumption when travelling; it is knob to confirm. The approxima- mean consumption for the last five useful to know the fuel consumption te distance (expressed in km and minutes (expressed in l/100 km and according to the type of driving (in rounded up or down by 1 km) which roun-ded up or down by 0.1 l/100 1/100 Km and with setting of 0.1 can be travelled with the fuel left in km.) is displayed. 1/100 Km) the tank providing the same mean The mean consumption value is up- consumption conditions computed dated by the system every second. since the function was switched on. The calculation accuracy is lower The range value is updated by the than 0.1 l/100 km. system every 30 seconds. The calcu- lation accuracy is lower than 1 km. P4T0610 P4T0611 IMPORTANT If the range is lower than 50 km and the fuel has reached the reserve level, a dotted line will ap- pear instead of the range value. If on the other hand the range is lower than 50 km but the fuel has not yet reached the reserve level, the value 50 will appear and not change. fig. 70 fig. 71 70 DISTANCE (distance driven) Average speed (fig. 73) Time elapsed (trip time) (fig. 74) (fig. 72) Select the AVERAGE SPEED func- Select the TIME ELAPSED function Select the DISTANZA (DISTANCE tion by turning knob 3 (fig. 61) and by turning knob 3 (fig. 61) and press TRAV) function by turning knob 3 press the knob to confirm. The mean the knob to confirm. The time since (fig. 61) and press the knob to confirm. speed since the beginning of the trip the trip computer was reset (ex- The distance driven since the trip com- is displayed (expressed in km/h and pressed in hours and minutes) is dis- puter was reset (expressed in km and rounded up or down by 0.1 km/h). played (see “Resetting the trip com- rounded up or down by 0.1 km) will The mean speed is computed by the puter”). appear (see “Resetting the trip com- system only when the engine is run- The mean speed value is updated by puter”). ning. the system every second. The calcula- The distance driven value is updated The mean speed value is updated by tion accuracy is lower than 2 seconds. by the system every second. The cal- the system every second. The calcula- The maximum value which can be culation accuracy is lower than 1 km. tion accuracy is lower than 0.1 km/h. displayed is 99 h and 59 minutes. The maximum value which can be displayed is 25,000 km. Select RETURN after adjusting the Select RETURN after adjusting the Select RETURN after adjusting the settings by turning knob 3 (fig. 61) settings by turning knob 3 (fig. 61) settings by turning knob 3 (fig. 61) and pressing to confirm. This will and pressing to confirm. This will and pressing to confirm. This will take you back to the trip computer take you back to the trip computer take you back to the trip computer main menu (fig. 69). main menu (fig. 69). main menu (fig. 69). P4T0630 P4T0613 P4T0614

fig. 72 fig. 73 fig. 74 71 Trip computer operation With the TRIP function on ( ✓ ), the Resetting the trip computer data must be manually reset by modalities The trip computer data can be reset means of the TRIP RESET function by selecting the TRIP RESET func- The KEY and TRIP functions (fig. 75) and the trip computer screen can be tion (fig. 75) by turning knob 3 can be used to set the two operative con- displayed by pressing the button (fig. 61) and pressing the knob to ditions of the system. TRIP 6 (fig. 61). confirm. Simply confirm to reset all The main different between the two Select KEY or TRIP by turning the stored data. conditions consists of the way the trip knob 3 (fig. 61) and press the knob The TRIP RESET function is only computer displays data and the way to confirm. Press knob 3 again to available in TRIP mode. the data is reset. switch between one modality and the With the KEY function on ( ✓ ), the other. If the TRIP function is on (manual trip computer screen is automatically data resetting), you can reset data by displayed each time that the engine is selecting and confirming the TRIP started and the data is automatically RESET field in the function screens. reset. P4T0628

fig. 75 72 SOUND SYSTEM (built into the Lancia I.C.S. - version without NAVIGATION system) The sound system is fitted with au- tomatic functions for volume ad- justment; should it be required to change their parameters see para- graph: EXPERT FUNCTIONS (CUS- TOMISING OPERATING PARAME- TERS) - EXP (14).

If you drive with the vol- ume too high you put both your own life and that of others in jeopardy.

fig. 76 P4T0709

73 CONTROLS 10 - LOUDNESS function button 19 - Dolby/Mono function selection (automatic in HI-FI systems) button 1 - Radio station, PTY programme pre-set button and CD one track for- 11 - Traffic Programme and Alter- 20 - Maximum reception sensitivity ward button native Frequency function buttons function button (for RDS programmes) 2 - Radio station, PTY programme 21 - RADIO settings button pre-set button and CD repeat track 12 - SCAN function (automatic ra- button dio station scanning) and MSS (Mu- 22 - LIGHT button (for adjusting display brightness) 3 - Radio station, PTY programme sic Search System) function (for skip- pre-set button and CD random track ping or repeating a track) button 23 - Eject tape button button 13 - IS function button (to seek the 4 - Radio station, PTY programme best received radio stations) pre-set button 14 - EXP function button (to cus- CONTROLS ON STEERING 5 - Radio station, PTY programme tomised sound system settings) WHEEL (fig. 77 - where fitted) pre-set button and previous CD but- 15 - Function and setting selection The main sound system controls are ton and confirmation knob duplicated on the steering wheel. The 6 - Radio station, PTY programme 16 - Radio waveband selection but- controls can consequently be operated pre-set button and next CD button ton (LW, MW, FM) and tape AU- without distracting the driver. 7 - Sound system function button TOREVERSE function. In some ver- (radio, tape player, CD player - where sions, the message DIR may appear fitted) instead of the symbol shown under

the BAND message. P4T0811 8 - AUDIO functions (Bass/Tre- ble/Balance/Fader/Volume) and 17 - Radio programme tuning up MUTE function (volume muting) se- and tape fast forward button lecting button. 18 - Radio programme tuning down 9 - Power knob: display, sound sys- and tape rewind button tem and volume

fig. 77 74 A - Volume up button Muting the volume Radio, Tape, CD settings B - MUTE button (MUTE function) Buttons D and F implement three different functions, according to the C - Volume down button Press the MUTE B button to switch the function on and off. The volume mode selected by means of the E but- D - Radio programme tuning up will immediately be turned down to ton (Radio, Tape or CD). and tape fast forward button zero. The button operation is identi- The operation of the buttons is iden- cal to that of the AUDIO z 8 button E - Sound system function button tical to that of the buttons 17 and 18 on the Lancia ICS (Mute function). (radio, tape player, CD player - where (fig. 76) on the Lancia ICS (described fitted) in detail in the following paragraphs). Radio, Tape, CD selection F - Radio programme tuning down (SRC function) and tape rewind button 1) Radio: tuning Repeatedly press the MODE E but- Press button D or F to tune to radio Adjusting the volume ton to cyclically select the functions: stations in the selected waveband. Radio, Tape (if a tape is in the Press button A to turn the volume CD deck), (if a CD player is fitted) 2) Tape: fast forward/rewind up or button C to turn it down, as and Phone (if a cellular telephone shown in “Adjusting the volume”. free-hands kit is fitted). Press button D or F to fast forward The button operation is identical to or rewind the tape as described in The operation of the E button is that of knob 9 (fig. 76) on the Lan- “Fast forward/rewind”. cia I.C.S. identical to that of the SRC 7 button (fig. 76) on the sound system.

75 3) CD: next track/previous track Reception conditions Only clean the front panel with a soft, anti-static cloth. Cleaning or pol- Press button D or F to play the next Reception conditions vary all the ishing agents could damage the sur- or previous track on the CD which is time while the car is moving. Recep- face. being played as described in “Select- tion may be effected by mountains, ing or repeating a track”. buildings or bridges, especially when Dirt on the player head from tapes you are a long way from the broad- can, in time, reduce treble during USEFUL ADVICE casting transmitter of the station you playback. are listening to. Road safety We recommend you clean the head periodically with a specific head IMPORTANT A considerable in- You should familiarise with the var- cleaner tape (non abrasive). ious function of the sound system crease in volume could occur when (e.g. storing stations) before driving traffic information is given. Keep CDs away from dust. Do not off. touch the surface to prevent skipping. Care and maintenance Do not insert damaged or deformed The basic structure of the sound sys- CDs in the magazine. tem ensures long-term operation Do not expose discs to sources of without the need for any particular heat or sun rays. maintenance. Get in touch with a If you drive with the vol- Lancia Dealership if anything goes Clean dirty CDs with a soft cloth ume too high you put both wrong. from the centre outwards. your own life and that of Do not leave tapes in direct sunlight others in jeopardy. You should ad- or expose them to excessive heat. Put just the volume so that you can the cassettes back into their boxes af- hear noises from outside the car ter use. (e.g. horns, ambulance/police si- rens, etc.). Use good quality tapes, no longer than C-90 to ensure optimal play- back.

76 Button Radio Tape CD changer Phone-in Press Press for Press for longer Press Press for longer Press Press for longer Press Press for longer briefly 2 to 4 seconds than 4 seconds briefly than 2 seconds briefly than 2 seconds briefly than 2 seconds

1 Select pre-set Store PTY ON TRACK REPEAT a TRK station (1-6) (■) ON/OFF PTY: select PTY: PTY Store programme (◆) type

2 Select pre-set Store Select REPEAT b RPT station (1-6) (■) or REPEAT MAG PTY: select PTY: PTY Store programme (◆) type

3 Select pre-set Store Select c RND station (1-6) (■) TRACK RANDOM PTY: select PTY: ON/OFF PTY Store programme (◆) type

4 Select pre-set Store d station (1-6) (■) PTY: select PTY: PTY Store programme (◆) type

5 Select pre-set Store Next CD e CD– station (1-6) (■) PTY: select PTY: PTY Store programme (◆) type

6 Select pre-set Store Previous CD f CD+ station (1-6) (■) PTY: select PTY: PTY Store programme (◆) type

(■) Store pre-set stations under buttons 1-6 (◆) Store PTY programme type (M) CD function status on

77 Button Radio Tape CD changer Phone-in Press Press for Press for longer Press Press for longer Press Press for longer Press Press for longer briefly 2 to 4 seconds than 4 seconds briefly than 2 seconds briefly than 2 seconds briefly than 2 seconds

SRC TAPE, CD, CD, RADIO, RADIO, PHONE, TAPE, CD, g RADIO, PHONE, TAPE TAPE, CD, (•) RADIO, PHONE PHONE (•) (•) (•)

AUDIO BASS, TREBLE, AUDIO MUTE BASS, TREBLE, AUDIO MUTE BASS, TREBLE, AUDIO MUTE BASS, TREBLE, AUDIO MUTE h BALANCE, ON/OFF BALANCE, ON/OFF BALANCE, ON/OFF BALANCE, ON/OFF z FADER FADER FADER FADER VOLUME (•) VOLUME (•) VOLUME (•) VOLUME (•) VOL ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF i Turn left: Turn left: Turn left: Turn left: volume down volume down volume down volume down Turn right: Turn right: Turn right: Turn right: volume up volume up volume up volume up j LOUD Select Select Select Select LOUDNESS LOUDNESS LOUDNESS LOUDNESS ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF TP TP function AF function TP function TP function k AF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF SCANN Select LEARN Select MSS Select TRACK l MSS SCAN ON/OFF ON/OFF SCAN ON/OFF (approximately (approximately 10 seconds) 10 seconds) IS FM: IS LEARN m function EXP Display EXPERT EXPERT CD changer EXPERT EXPERT n frequencies MODE ON MODE ON status (M) MODE ON MODE ON and customised settings 15 Turn to select o functions Press to confirm selections

BAND FM1, FM2, FM3, FM: AUTOSTORE Manual tape p MW, LW AM: AUTOSTORE REVERSE (■) Store pre-set stations under buttons 1-6 (◆) Store PTY programme type (M) CD function status on (•) Cyclical selection

78 Button Radio Tape CD changer Phone-in Press Press for Press for longer Press Press for longer Press Press for longer Press Press for longer briefly 2 to 4 seconds than 4 seconds briefly than 2 seconds briefly than 2 seconds briefly than 2 seconds © AM: Automatic AM: Manual FM: Manual Fast forward Select next track Rewind q search tuning tuning With MSS on: FM: LEARN FM: Select Skip track/seek SCAN IS SCAN or next track FM SEARCH RDS SEARCH PTY: Select PTY: Automatic next search or programme selected PTY type programme type Rewind r ß AM: Automatic AM: Manual FM: Manual Rewind Select previous search tuning tuning With MSS on: track FM: LEARN FM: Select Skip track/seek SCAN IS SCAN or start of track FM SEARCH RDS SEARCH PTY: Select PTY: Automatic previous search or programme selected PTY type programme type DOLBY Select Select Dolby B s MONO STEREO/MONO ON/OFF DX Select t maximum reception sensitivity

HELP Radio setting u RADIO screen

Adjust Adjust display LIGHT Adjust display Adjust display Adjust display Adjust display Adjust display Adjust display Adjust display v display brightness brightness brightness brightness brightness brightness brightness brightness brightness Open flap Open flap Open flap Open flap w ˚ Eject tape Eject tape Eject tape Eject tape Fast forward (■) Store pre-set stations under buttons 1-6 (◆) Store PTY programme type (M) CD function status on

79 GENERAL Safety SWITCHING THE SOUND The sound system will be electroni- SYSTEM ON AND OFF Anti-theft protection cally protected if the electrical power The sound system will be automati- This sound system is equipped with is disconnected when the code is on. cally switched on when the engine is an anti-theft protection system con- Only you can start the device again started (i.e. when the key is turned to sisting of a four-digit secret code. by entering its specific code. MAR) along with the ICS and is switched off when the key is turned to The protection system makes the STOP. sound system useless if it removed Display (stolen) from the dashboard. The sound system can be switched If the device has been disconnected on when the key is off or removed from the power supply, enter the se- CODE card by pressing knob 9 (fig. 76). It will cret code and set the time and the switched off automatically after ap- The model, the serial number and date. proximately 20 minutes. In this case, the respective secret code are shown For instruction on setting the clock the display brightness cannot be ad- on the sound system papers. and adjusting the device brightness, justed. The serial number is identical to see “Lancia ICS with multifunctional The switching on and off modality that printed on the device chassis. display”. can be changed by means of the IGN The CODE card facilitates searches function (see the EXPERT function Operation with cellular phone if the sound system is lost. Further- which can be accessed by pressing the more, the ownership paper speeds up The sound system can be connected EXP 14 button). compensation procedures on behalf of to a free-hand cellular phone kit. insurance companies. FUNCTION AND SETTING The sound will be muted when the SELECTION AND Keep the papers in a safe place. cellular phone is in use. CONFIRMATION BUTTON (15) Knob 15 (fig. 76) on the right-hand side of the control panel is used to se- lect and confirm the settings.

80 Turn the knob clockwise or anti- Setting the traffic announcement Muting the volume during a clockwise to go from one parameter volume phone call to the other. Use the TAVOL function for this Use the PHONE function for this The selected parameter will appear purpose (see the EXPERT functions purpose (see the EXPERT functions brighter. which can be accessed by means of which can be accessed by means of Press the knob to confirm the dis- the EXP 14 button). the EXP 14 button). played parameter selection. Setting the switch-on volume RADIO SETTINGS BUTTON (21) ADJUSTING THE VOLUME Use the ONVOL function for this Press the HELP RADIO 21 button purpose (see the EXPERT functions (fig. 76) with the key at MAR. A Volume which can be accessed by means of screen showing the settings will ap- the EXP 14 button). pear after the LANCIA trademark 9 fig. 76 Turn knob ( ) to adjust the screen. The settings are: volume. Turn the knob clockwise to turn the volume up and anticlockwise Setting the volume according to – VOLUME to turn it down. car speed – BASS A 16 bar symbol will appear on the Use the SCVOL function for this – TREBLE display. The bars will light up pro- purpose (see the EXPERT functions gressively as the volume increases. which can be accessed by means of – BALANCE The symbol will disappear automati- the EXP 14 button). – FADER cally approximately five seconds after z the adjustment. Muting the volume (MUTE) – STATION 1 z The volume can also be adjusted by Press the AUDIO 8 button for – STATION 2 means of the buttons on the steering longer than one second to mute the wheel (where fitted). Press button A volume. – STATION 3 (fig. 74) to turn the volume up and Press the AUDIO z 8 button again – STATION 4 button C to turn it down. for longer than one second to restore – STATION 5 the volume. – STATION 6

81 – FM1 AUDIO SETTINGS (8) The active function is shown in the right-hand part of the display while – FM2 Press the AUDIO z 8 button (fig. 76) the settings are shown by a bar sym- with the key at MAR. A screen (fig. 78) – FM3 bol in the left-hand part of the dis- showing the settings will appear after play. Turn knob 9 (fig. 76) to adjust the LANCIA trademark screen. The set- – LW the settings: tings are: – MW. – BASS: to adjust the bass tones – BASS See “Audio settings” for details on (from -6 to +6) – TREBLE how to adjust the VOLUME, BASS, – TREBLE: to adjust the treble TREBLE, BALANCE and FADER – BALANCE tones (from -6 to +6) functions. – FADER – BALANCE: to balance the sound The names or the frequencies of the between the speakers on the right- six pre-set stations refer to the se- – VOLUME. hand side and the left-hand side of lected waveband (FM1 - FM2 - FM3 Repeatedly press the AUDIO z 8 the passenger compartment (from 15 - LW - MW). button to cyclically switch from one L = left to 15 R = right) Select RETURN ( ) and confirm function to the other. – FADER: to balance the sound be- to return to the main menu. tween the front and rear speakers The ( ) symbol will turn white (from 15 R = rear to 15 F = front) when it is selected. – VOLUME: to adjust the volume (from 0 to 16). P4T0629 The system will automatically quit the AUDIO settings screen five sec- onds after the last adjustment.

fig. 78 82 IMPORTANT The various AUDIO You should use this function when – TAPE settings are stored for the different you are tuned to a very poor station – CD (where fitted) functions (TAPE - RADIO - CD - to reduce the background noise. The PHONE). The settings are re-pre- message “STEREO” will disappear – RADIO (FM, MW or LW) sented when the function is selected. when the function is on. – PHONE (if a free-hands cellular You should use this function when phone system is fitted only). Loudness function (10) playing back a poorly recorded tape The system will automatically quit Press the LOUD 10 button (fig. 76) to reduce the background noise. The symbol M will appear on the displace the function selection screen a few to switch the function LOUDNESS on seconds after the last selection. and off. when the function is on. The loudness function improves low The Dolby noise reduction device is RADIO volume playback. made under licence from the Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Selecting the waveband The message “LOUD” will appear M Dolby and double D ( ) symbol are FM waveband: repeatedly press the on the display when the function is registered trademarks of the Dolby on. BAND 16 button until the required Laboratories Licensing Corporation. waveband appears on the display The Loudness function is automatic (“FM1”, “FM2” or “FM3”). in HI-FI sound system versions. SELECTING A FUNCTION (RADIO/TAPE/CD) AM waveband: repeated press the BAND 16 button until the required Dolby/Mono function (M-MONO) Press the SRC 7 button to display waveband appears on the display (19) the various functions. Press the but- (“MW” medium waves or “LW” long Press the M -MONO 19 button (fig. 76) ton briefly again to make your choice: waves). to switch the function on and off.

83 Last Station Memory Switching TP function on and off IMPORTANT Traffic announce- ments are played at pre-set volume. After the selection, you can listen to Press the TP/AF 11 (fig. 76) button The volume can be changed by means the last programme/station tuned to briefly. of the EXPERT function. in the specific waveband (Last Sta- The message “TP” will appear on tion Memory). If you wish to listen to traffic an- the display when the function is on. nouncements only, switch the “traffic With the Last Station Memory func- programme” function on by means of tion, the device memorises the settings IMPORTANT If the station tuned to the TP/AF 11 button and turn the made before it was turned off - sta- is not an RDS station broadcasting volume completely down with knob 9 tion, tape, CD - and represents them traffic announcements, a search for a (fig. 76). the following time the device is turned suitable station will be started. on. Tape or CD playback will be inter- Interrupting traffic announcements rupted during traffic announcements. Stereo reception - FM Press the TP/AF 11 button briefly. Alternative frequencies (AF) When the radio is tuned to a stereo The traffic announcement function station the message “STEREO” will will however be kept on. When tuned to an RDS station appear on the display. which is broadcast by several stations The sound system features the EON on different frequencies, the sound function which allows the system to Tuning to Traffic Programmes system will automatically switch to automatically tune to another station the best received frequency. (TP) providing traffic announcements in TP (Traffic Programme) = An RDS the same network as the one you are station broadcasting traffic announ- listening to (only when the TP func- cements. tion is on). It will automatically switch back to the original station when the announcement is over.

84 IMPORTANT In poor reception ar- Tuning to RDS stations IMPORTANT Always wait for the eas, the attempts to switch to alterna- (IS LEARN function) automatic Intelligent Search (IS) to tive frequencies may lead to frequent end. If no station can be received, the interruptions of sound. In this case, Up to 30 programmes can be stored automatic intelligent search function the AF function can be switched off. in the IS memory (a memory area not can remain on, e.g. in an under- corresponding to the pre-set station ground garage or if the aerial is buttons) with a touch of the IS Switching the AF function off faulty. In this case, you can stop the LEARN button. automatic search function by pressing IMPORTANT This function can The stored programmes can be re- a pre-set station button from 1 to 6. only be turned off when tuned to sta- called in sequence. The automatic IS intelligent search tions with alternative frequencies. Use the IS memory function to re- functions stores up to 30 stations with Press the TP/AF 11 button for ap- programme pre-set station buttons or optimal reception. proximately three seconds until the when you are in a new reception area During automatic IS intelligent message “AF --” appears on the dis- but you do not want to delete the pre- search, RDS programmes will be play. The message “AF OFF” will ap- viously stored stations. stored first and ordered by pro- pear when the button is released and gramme code. Then FM stations will the message “AF” will not appear any Starting the IS LEARN automatic be stored. longer. station search Recalling the IS memory content Switching the AF function back on Select either “FM1”, “FM2” or “FM3” by means of the BAND 16 Select IS operating mode by press- Press the TP/AF 11 button for ap- button (fig. 76). ing either button 17 or 18 for ap- proximately three seconds until the Press the IS 13 button: the message proximately three seconds until the message “AF ON” appears on the dis- message “IS --” appears on the dis- play and release the button. “IS ...” will appear on the display while the tuner is searching wave- play. The message “AF” will appear on band. The message “IS ON” will appear the display. when the button is released.

85 In this case, the search will follow Pre-set station buttons Recalling stored RDS the station code order. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 stations/programmes Press either button 17 or 18 briefly Select the waveband (FM1, FM2, Select the waveband (FM1, FM2, to recall the stored stations in the re- FM3, MW or LW) by means of the FM3, MW or LW) by means of the quired order. During selection, the BAND 16 button. BAND 16 button. message “IS-SCAN” will appear on the display. Press a pre-set station button num- Tuning to an RDS bered from 1 to 6 briefly. Switching the IS operative mode off. station/programme The stored stations will be kept in Press either button 17 or 18 for ap- If the RDS station/programme memory even when the sound system proximately three seconds until the tuned to in the selected waveband power is disconnected. message “IS --” appears on the dis- (e.g. “FM1”) is stored at one of the play. pre-set station buttons numbered Tuning to RDS stations/ from 1 to 6, the respective digit will programmes with automatic The message “IS OFF” will then ap- appear on the display, e.g. “3” for pear on the display. pre-set station 3. station search In this condition, the search will be 1) Select the waveband (FM1, FM2, made according to the order of pro- Storing RDS stations/programmes FM3, MW or LW) by means of the BAND 16 button. gramme frequency. Press a pre-set station button num- The automatic station search is de- bered from 1 to 6 for longer than two For automatic searches in FM1, scribed in detail in the specific para- seconds until you hear the station FM2 or FM3 wavebands, switch the graph. again. IS operative mode off. In order to do this, press either button 17 or 18 for The AF tuning function will be The sound system stores the last approximately three seconds until the stored with the station. search modality in memory (“IS ON” message “IS --” appears on the dis- or “IS OFF”). play. The message “IS OFF” will then appear on the display.

86 Automatic search in the FM wave- 3) To store the tuned station under If the RDS station/programme tuned bands works according to two levels a pre-set station button, follow the to in the selected waveband (e.g. of sensitivity. During the first scan in procedure described in the previous “FM”) is stored at one of the pre-set the reception band, the system seeks paragraph “Pre-set station buttons”. station buttons numbered from 1 to 6, only the stations presenting high in- the respective digit will appear on the tensity fields (local stations). During Manual frequency tuning display, e.g. “3” for stored station 3. the second scan, the system seeks sta- 4) To store the tuned station at a tions with low intensity fields (distant 1) Select the waveband (FM1, FM2, pre-set station button, follow the pro- reception). The message “DX” will FM3, MW or LW) by means of the cedure described in the previous appear on the display during the BAND 16 button. paragraph “Pre-set station buttons”. search. 2) Press either button 17 or 18 for 5) Ending manual frequency tuning: 2) Press either button 17 or 18 brie- approximately six seconds until the press a pre-set station button num- fly to start automatic search in the re- message “MAN” appears on the dis- bered from 1 to 6 briefly. quired direction. The respective fre- play with the frequency (e.g. “MAN quency will appear on the display 100.60”). IMPORTANT (e.g. “99.40”). If no button is pres- Hold either button 17 or 18 pressed sed for more than 60 seconds, the When a station with identification to fast forward. manual frequency tuning function is code is found, the code is shown on 3) Tune in the required direction by switched off automatically. the display. If not, the frequency is pressing either button 17 or 18. Press shown. button 17 to increase the frequency If the RDS station/programme tuned by 50 kHz units in FM and 1 kHz to in the selected waveband (e.g. units in AM. Press button 18 to re- “FM1”) is stored at one of the pre-set duce frequency in the same fashion. station buttons numbered from 1 to 6, the respective digit will appear on the display, e.g. “3” for pre-set station 3.

87 Automatic station storing The PTY function can act a search LIGHT M Light classical music filter to tune only to stations broad- (AUTOSTORE) CLASSICS Classical music casting programmes with the pre-set To automatically store the strongest PTY code (e.g. “POP”). OTHER M Musical programmes stations in local reception mode in the not included in the selected waveband under the pre-set Programme types categories listed (e.g. station buttons numbered from 1 to 6. folklore) The programme types offered by a Select the waveband (FM1, FM 2, radio station can change: WEATHER Weather forecasts FM3, MW or LW) by repeatedly press- ing the BAND 16 button (fig. 76). NEWS News bulletins and FINANCE Financial news bul- current affairs letins Press the BAND 16 button for ap- proximately six seconds until the mes- AFFAIRS Politics and events CHILDREN Programmes for chil- sage “AS” and the frequency appear dren on the display. INFO Special information programmes SOCIAL A Social information The best received station at the end RELIGION Religious and philo- of the search will be tuned to. SPORT Sports programmes sophical programmes EDUCATE Educational and trai- Programme types (PTY) ning programmes PHONE IN Listeners’ phone-in programmes (differ- Many radio stations in the FM band DRAMA Drama and literature ent from the “phone (FM1, FM2, FM3) offer a “Pro- CULTURE Culture, church and in” function active gramme type” (PTY) service. For ex- religion only when connected ample, when a news bulletin is being to a free-hands cellu- broadcast the message “NEWS” will SCIENCE Science lar phone kit) appear on the display. VARIED Variety TRAVEL Tourism POP Pop music (hits) LEISURE Leisure, hobbies and ROCK M Rock music spare time activities EASY M Easy listening JAZZ Jazz music

88 COUNTRY Country music PTY function The PTY automatic search will au- tomatically stop at the following sta- NATIONAL National programmes 1) Starting the PTY function tion offering the selected programme OLDIES Golden Oldies type. The programme type (e.g. Press the TP/AF 11 button for ap- “POP”) and the message “PTY” will FOLK M Folk music proximately six seconds until the mes- appear on the display. DOCU Special reports sage “PTY ON” appears on the dis- play. Then the last selected programme IMPORTANT If no station offers NO PTY No programme type type will appear (e.g. “POP”). the selected programme type, the identification code sound system will tune to the last 2) Setting the programme type tuned station and the PTY function Automatic PTY search Press a button from 1 to 6 briefly. will be abandoned. There are two possible ways to select The automatic PTY search will start a automatic programme type search. from the first station offering the se- 3) Switching the PTY function off lected programme type. The pro- 1) Six programme types are as- This will occur automatically after gramme type will be shown briefly signed to the 1-6 PTY buttons (pre- approximately 10 seconds. (e.g. “POP”) followed by the station set station buttons). The pre-set as- code and the message “PTY”. signment can be changed at will. Pre-set PTY programme buttons - Alternatively - 2) You can choose a programme Pre-set station buttons type from the stored list and start the Repeatedly press either button 17 or automatic search. 18 until the required programme type The standard setting is: 1 NEWS, appears on the display. 2 SPORT, 3 POP, 4 ROCK M, 5 The procedure is described in the CLASSICS and 6 EDUCATE. following paragraphs. Press either button 17 or 18 for ap- proximately two seconds to start the PTY automatic search.

89 Each pre-set station button can be Scanning pre- set stations (SCAN EXPERT FUNCTION set to a programme type as required: function) (12) (CUSTOMISING THE 1) Switch the PTY function on. The scan function automatically OPERATING PARAMETERS) - Press the TP/AF 11 button for ap- scans the stations stored with the IS EXP (14) proximately six seconds until the mes- function. Each station will be played To make the everyday use of the sage “PTY ON” appears on the dis- for ten seconds. sound system as easy as possible, the play. Select the required programme EXPERT function can be used to cus- type (e.g. “NEWS”). Press the SCAN 12 button to switch the function on. tomise certain settings which need to 2) Repeatedly press either button 17 be used only once or very occasion- or 18 until the required programme Maximum reception sensitivity ally. type appears on the display. (DX function) (20) Press the EXP 14 button (fig. 76) with the key at MAR to access the 3) Press one of the pre-set station The DX function is used to obtain buttons for longer than two seconds. EXPERT functions. The EXPERT the maximum radio station sensitiv- function screen with appear after the ity allowing to automatically tune to LANCIA trademark screen. RDS station frequency local stations regardless of the other The frequency of the RDS station radio functions. Press the EXP 14 button again to quit the EXPERT function. currently tuned to can be displayed. Press DX 20 to switch the function Press the EXP 14 button briefly. on and off. The transmission frequency will be The message “DX” will appear on the display when the function in on. displayed for approximately ten sec- P4T0616 onds in the place of the station name.

fig. 79 90 Possible EXPERT setting list – PHONE SETTING (PHONE ON/ Selecting and adjusting the (fig. 76) OFF) - To mute the sound for incom- settings ing or outgoing phone calls with con- – RDS CLOCK SYNC (SYNC ON/ nected free-hands kit. Select the setting to be checked or OFF) - To switch synchronisation of changed with the buttons 17 and 18 clock to RDS station signals on and – PHONE AMPLIFICATION (PHO- (fig. 76). off. NE 00/03) - To set the cellular phone input sensitivity (to be calibrated when For example, to adjust the maxi- – TA VOLUME ADJUST (TAVOL) the free-hand phone kit is fitted). mum switch-on volume, select the - To set the minimum volume for ONVOL function with the buttons 17 traffic announcements. – SPEED-CONTROLLED VOLU- or 18. The ONVOL function and the ME (SCVOL) - To set the volume ac- current setting (e.g. ONVOL 13) will – AUTO-LEARN TP (LRN ON/ cording to the car speed (SCV). appear on the display. The station OFF) - To automatically search for – THEFT-PROTECTION CODE which the radio is tuned to will be traffic announcement programmes. (CODE) - To activate the safety code. played at the set volume. – RDS REGION (REG ON/OFF) - The information concerning the set- Adjust the volume as required with To switch the automatic regional pro- tings is given in the right-hand part the buttons 4 and 5: gramme tuning function on and off. of the display : – press button 5: to turn the volume – RADIO-ON MAXIMUM VOLU- – function description up ME (ONVOL) - To set the maximum – buttons 4-5 (fig. 76) for adjusting – press button 4: to turn the volume switch-on volume. the setting down. – BDLY ON/OFF - To set the – buttons to select the new function Press the button repeatedly to adjust booster switch-on delay (where fit- (17 for the following function - 18 for the setting gradually or hold it pres- ted). the previous function) (fig. 76). sed to adjust the setting fast. – IGNITION LOGIC (IGN ON/OFF) The current function setting is When you have made the required - To switch the sound system on au- shown in the left-hand side of the dis- setting, you can make other adjust- tomatically with the engine. play. ments (use buttons 17 and 18 to se- lect the function) or quit the EX- The last selected setting is recalled PERT function by press the EXP 14 with the EXPERT function. button.

91 Switching synchronisation of Setting the minimum volume for lected station until it is basically il- clock to RDS station signals traffic announcements legible. on and off Select the TA VOLUME ADJUST With “LRN ON” the sound system Select the RDS CLOCK SYNC (TAVOL) setting (value from 4 to 31) tunes to a new station as soon as the (SYNC ON/OFF) setting (fig. 80): (fig. 81): received signal quality decreases. – button 5 = “SYNC ON”. The sys- – button 4 = VOL - (to turn the vol- If you are travelling in an area tem clock is synchronised with the ume down). where the reception of RDS pro- RDS data. – button 5 = VOL + (to turn the vol- grammes broadcasting traffic an- ume up). nouncements is poor, you can stop the – button 4 = “SYNC OFF”. The syn- radio station search. chronisation feature can be switched During setting, the volume heard is off in areas where no RDS TIMER sig- that selected for traffic announce- Select the AUTO-LEARN TP (LRN nals are received. ments. ON/OFF) setting (fig. 82): – button 5 = “LRN ON” to auto- Very often the timer signal broad- Automatically traffic cast by the stations is wrong. matically search for traffic announce- announcement programmes ments, search – button 4 = “LRN OFF” if you do With “LRN OFF” (standard) the not want to automatically search for sound system remains tuned to the se- traffic announcements. P4T0616 P4T0617 P4T0618

fig. 80 fig. 81 fig. 82 92 Switching automatic regional Setting the maximum switch-on Setting the booster switch-on programme tuning function on volume delay (where fitted) and off Select the RADIO-ON MAXIMUM Select the BDLY ON/OFF setting If an RDS programme consists of VOLUME (ON VOL) setting (value (fig. 85): from -- to 31) (fig. 84): several regional programmes, the – button 5 = “BDLY ON”. sound system can switch between – button 5 = VALUE + (to turn the – button 4 = “BDLY OFF”. programmes due to changes in recep- volume up). tion. This function eliminates “boosts” – button 4 = VALUE – (to turn the when switching the system on and off. Select the RDS REGION (REG ON/ volume down). OFF) setting (fig. 83): Volume is limited only if the volume – button 5 = “REG ON” automatic of the sound system is higher than the regional programme tuning is possi- set volume when it is switched off. ble. – button 4 = “REG OFF” automatic regional programme tuning is not possible. P4T0619 P4T0620 P4T0621

fig. 83 fig. 84 fig. 85 93 Switching the sound system on – “PHONE OFF”. No telephone – the sound system will switch on automatically with the engine connected automatically Select the IGNITION LOGIC (IGN – “PHONE ON”. When the tele- – the sound system will set to the ON/OFF) setting (fig. 86): phone is in use, the sound system is same sound conditions as the last tele- automatically muted. phone call (BASS, TREBLE, FADER, – button 5 = “IGN ON”. The sound BALANCE) system can be switched on/off by The “PHONE ON” function is ac- means of the car’s ignition switch. tive providing the phone mute on the – the sound system will automati- cellular phone support is connected. cally switch off at the end of the call. – button 4 = “IGN OFF”. The sound system can be switched on/off by “PHONE IN” The telephone con- Setting the cellular phone input means of the knob 9 (fig. 76) only. versation can be heard by means of the car speakers. sensitivity (to be calibrated when the free-hands kit is fitted) Muting the sound for incoming The “PHONE IN” is active provid- or outgoing phone calls with ing your cellular phone is connected To adapt to the level of signal emis- connected free-hands kit to the free-hand control unit (where sion of the installed free-hands kit. fitted). This setting is to be made by the Select the PHONE SETTING (PHO- Lancia Dealership when the free- NE ON/OFF) setting and use buttons If the sound system is off, telephone hands kit is fitted. 4 and 5 to adjust (fig. 87): calls (incoming or outgoing) are how- ever possible: Select the PHONE AMPLIFICA- TION (PHONE 00/03) setting and use buttons 4 and 5 to adjust

P4T0622 P4T0623 (fig. 88): – “PHONE 00” Low input sensitiv- ity – “PHONE 03” High input sensitiv- ity.

fig. 86 fig. 87 94 Set the volume according to the 2) Press the EXP 14 button for ap- Activating the safety code proximately three seconds until the car speed (SCV) If the message “CODE” appears on message “EXPERT” appears on the the display, the code is not on. IMPORTANT For road safety rea- display. sons, this setting must not be made by If the message “SAFE” appears on 3) Select “SCVOL” settings by the driver. the display, the code is on. means of either button 17 or 18 . Select the SPEED-CONTROLLED IMPORTANT For more detailed in- 4) For higher speeds: press either VOLUME (SCVOL) setting (value structions, see the following chapter. from -- to 34) (fig. 89): buttons 4 or 5 to set the required vol- ume: – “SCVOL 19”: standard setting SAFETY CODE – button 5: VOL + (to turn the vol- The sound system safety code is – “SCVOL - -”: setting off ume up) written on the CODE card (fig. 90). – “SCVOL 34”: top effectiveness – button 4: VOL - (to turn the vol- The code is not activated by the man- Adjust the setting as follows: ume down). ufacturer. 1) With the car at a standstill and 5) Press the EXP 14 button for If you have activated the sound sys- the engine running: set required vol- longer than two seconds. tem safety code: the sound system will ume by means of knob 9 (fig. 76). be electronically protected if the elec- trical power is disconnected. It can only be used again by entering the code. P4T0624 P4T0625

LANCIA P4T0306

fig. 88 fig. 89 fig. 90 95 Is the code on? 3) Enter the code with buttons from To quit the EXPERT function: press 2 to 5 (fig. 76). the EXP 14 button for approximately Select the EXPERT function and three seconds. press either button 17 or 18 until ei- Button 2 is used to enter the first ther the message “SAFE” or “CODE” code digit, button 3 to enter the sec- (THEFT-PROTECTION CODE set- ond digit, button 4 to enter the third Deactivating the code ting) appear on the display (fig. 91): digit and button 5 to enter the fourth 1) Select the EXPERT function and digit. – SAFE = Code on press buttons 17 or 18 until the mes- For example, to enter the code 1 7 0 3, sage “SAFE” (THEFT-PROTEC- – CODE = Code off. press button 2 briefly once only. The TION CODE setting) appears on the message 1 - - - will appear on the dis- display. Activating the code play. 2) To activate settings, press button 1) Select EXPERT function and Enter the second digit by briefly 2 briefly. The message “1 - - - “ will press either button 17 or 18 until the pressing button 3 seven times. The appear on the display. message “CODE” appears on the dis- message 1 7 - - will appear on the dis- 3) Enter the code (see “Safety code”) play. play. as described in “Activating the code” 2) Activate setting by briefly press- You can now enter the third digit. by pressing the buttons numbered ing button 2. The message “- - - -” Press button 4 ten times. The message from 2 to 5. will appear on the display. 1 7 0 - will appear on the display. 4) Confirm the code by pressing the Finally, complete the code by press- EXP 14 button briefly until the mes- ing button 5 three times. The message sage “CODE” appears on the display. P4T0626 1 7 0 3 will appear on the display. The code is no longer active. Press the button longer to decrease IMPORTANT If an incorrect code is the digit by one unit. entered, the message “SAFE” will be 4) To confirm the code: press the shown on the display. Repeat the en- EXP 14 button briefly. The message tire procedure. Respect stand-by “SAFE” will appear on the display. times between attempts (see “Stand- The code is on. by times”). fig. 91 96 Resetting for use IMPORTANT If an incorrect code is The digit indicating the following at- entered, the message “SAFE” will re- tempt (e.g. “2 - - - -”) will appear on The sound system will be electroni- main on the display and the sound the display when the stand-by time is cally protected if the code is on and system will not work. Repeat the en- over. the electrical power is disconnected tire procedure. (e.g. if the battery is disconnected for The following table shows the stand- servicing). Respect stand-by times between at- by times between attempts. tempts (see “Stand-by times”). Reconnect the electrical power and After the sixth attempt, we recom- proceed as follows: mend you contact a Lancia Dealer- Stand-by times ship either to have the secret code en- 1) Switch the sound system on. The tered or deactivated. message “SAFE” will appear on the Specific stand-by times (between at- display. After approximately three tempts) are featured to avoid entering seconds the message “1 - - - - “ will and deactivating the code by at- appear. “1” identifies the number of tempts. During the stand-by time, the attempts to enter the code. sound system can be switched on and off but it will not work. 2) Enter the code (see “Safety code”) as described in “Activating the Do not switch the sound system on code” by pressing the buttons num- during the stand-by times. The sound bered from 2 to 5. system, however, should be connected to the electrical power. 3) To confirm the code: press the EXP 14 button briefly. The message The message “SAFE” will appear on “SAFE” will appear temporarily on the display to indicate the stand-by the display. The sound system will time is not over. start working after approximately three seconds.

97 Ineffective Stand-by TAPE PLAYER MSS function attemps time Switching the tape player on MSS = Music Search System (on the display) (approximate) Insert a tape cassette in the Lancia This function skips or repeats a ICS panel deck. The message “TAPE track. 1 A” or “TAPE B” will appear on the The MSS function works with over ] 21 seconds display. three second pauses between tracks 2 If there is a tape in the deck, repeat- (without announcements). ] 1.5 minutes edly press the SRC 7 button until the Musical tracks with very low sec- 3 message “TAPE” appears on the dis- tions (e.g. classical music) are not play. ] 5.5 minutes suited for this function as the system mistakes the sections for pauses. 4 Reversing the tape side ] 22 minutes Press the BAND 16 button briefly. Switching the MSS function on 5 Press the SCAN/MSS 12 button ] 1.5 hours Tape side will change automatically when the end of the tape is reached during tape playback. The message 6 ] (AUTOREVERSE function). “MSS ON” will appear on the display. 6 hours The meaning of the symbols on the MSS will start according to the tape 7 display is: direction. ] 24 hours “TAPE A” = upper tape side 8 Starting the MSS function “TAPE B” = lower tape side. Press either button 17 or 18 during tape playback. Press button 17 to skip the track be- ing played. Press button 18 to repeat the track being played.

98 Ending the MSS function before Switching the tape off CD PLAYER time Press button 23 (fig. 76): the tape The sound system is set up to oper- Press either button 17 or 18. will be ejected. ate a compatible CD player (available from Lineaccessori Lancia). - Alternatively - Switching the MSS function off Press the SRC 7 button. The sou-rce Press the SCAN/MSS 12 button will change from TAPE to CD (if the during tape playback. The message CD CHANGER is fitted) or RADIO. “MSS OFF” will appear on the dis- Contact a Lancia Dealer- play. Source selection is sequential: RA- ship exclusively for fitting DIO, TAPE, CD. and connecting the CD Fast forward/rewind player. IMPORTANT The source is switched Press either button 18 or 17. The immediately but the tape player will message “<< WIND” or “WIND >>” end the current function if the tape will appear on the display. fast forward/rewind function is on. The Lineaccessori Lancia CD player is equipped with a magazine (chan- ger) which can hold up to six CDs. Stopping the function General information Press either button 17 or 18 briefly. Tape playback will be interrupted Tape playback will start automati- by a traffic announcement when the Multimedia CDs contain cally. TP function is on. sound and data tracks. Playing these CDs can IMPORTANT You can interrupt the cause noise loud enough to jeop- announcement being broadcast with- ardise road safety and damage fi- out altering the possibility of receiv- nal system stages and speakers. ing other announcements by briefly pressing the TP/AF 11 button.

99 Filling the magazine Inserting the magazine – Insert the magazine C (fig. 95) in the CD player with the labelled side The magazine contains six trays for in the CD player (see arrow) facing upwards. one CD each. Proceed as follows: – Close the sliding flap D (fig. 96) To playback a CD, extract a tray – Move the sliding flap A (fig. 94) after inserting the magazine to avoid from the magazine (fig. 92) and in- completely to the right until it locks. grit and dust from getting inside the sert a CD (fig. 93). – Check that switch B is in position player. Make sure the CD label is facing the “1”. right way, i.e. towards the tray. If not, Removing the magazine from the the player will not work. CD player The player cannot be used to play 8 P4T0253 Proceed as follows: cm CDs unless a specific adapter, which can be purchased at HI-FI – Move the sliding flap A (fig. 94) stores, is fitted. completely to the right until it locks. – Press the eject button E (fig. 97) on the CD player.

fig. 93 P4T0252 P4T0254 P4T0255

fig. 92 fig. 94 fig. 95 100 Removing the CDs from CD PLAYER OPERATION Selecting or repeating a track the magazine Seleting the CD CHANGER Briefly and repeatedly press either Remove the CDs in order after re- source button 17 or 18 until the required moving the respective supports from track number appears on the display. the magazine. Briefly and repeatedly press SRC 7 button until the message “CD” ap- 17: next track pears on the display. 18: either repeats the track being played back or plays the previous Selecting a CD track. Briefly and repeatedly press button 5 or 6 until the required CD number Playing each track on the P4T0256 appears on the display. selected CD for ten seconds (SCAN function) 5: previous CD Press the SCAN/MSS 12 button 6: next CD. briefly. The message “SCAN ON” will appear briefly on the display. To stop the function, press the SCAN/MSS 12 button briefly. The fig. 96 message “SCAN OFF” will appear on the display briefly. P4T0257

fig. 97 101 Fast forward/backward Repeating a CD (REPEAT) Ending CD operation (TRACK FAST) To play the current CD repeatedly: Press the SRC 7 button to listen to To fast play a track at low volume: press button 2. The message “RPT the radio. CD” will appear on the display. – FORWARD: press button 17 and IMPORTANT Press the TP/AF 11 A different CD can however be se- hold it pressed. button briefly to interrupt the an- lected with this function. – BACKWARDS: press button 18 nouncement in progress without in- and hold it pressed. To stop the function, press button 2. hibiting the reception of other an- The message “RPT MAG” will appear nouncements. Repeating a track on the display. (TRACK REPEAT) CD status display Playing the tracks in random Briefly press the EXP 14 button. A To playback a track repeatedly: order (TRACK RANDOM) press button 1. The message “TRK message will appear on the display in- ON” will appear on the display. To play the tracks in random order: dicating if a special function is on press button 3. The message “RND (e.g. “TRK ON”). A different track can however be se- ON” will appear on the display. The lected with the TRACK REPEAT selected CD tracks will be played in function. random order. To stop the function, press button 1. To end random track playback, The message “TRK OFF” will appear press button 3. The message “RND on the display. OFF” will appear on the display.

IMPORTANT The TRACK RAN- DOM function cannot be combined with the TRACK REPEAT and RE- PEAT functions.

102 CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

fig. 98 P4T0812

103 1 - Windscreen defrosting and demi- The air is let into the passenger Fixed vents C (fig. 100) for defrost- sting vents compartment through a set of vents ing or demisting the front side win- on the dashboard, on the front door dows are located in the front door 2 - Front side windows defrosting panels, on the central unit and on the panels. and demisting vents floor as shown in (fig. 98). 3 - Central directional and adjustable vents 4 - Side directional and adjustable DIRECTIONAL AND vents ADJUSTABLE VENTS (fig. 99-100-101) 5 - Front footwell air vents The vents can be turned upwards or

6 - Rear footwell air vents downwards and towards the left and P4T0711 7 - Rear directional and adjustable the right with control A. vents The amount of air is adjusted with The passenger compartment climate control B. can be controlled (i.e. heating, venti- lation and cooling, where fitted) as O = all open follows: ● = all closed. – manually, by selecting the func- fig. 100 tions by means of the control panel buttons; – automatically, by means of the P4T0035 P4T0022 system electronic control unit.

fig. 99 fig. 101 104 AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM: HEATING, VENTILATION AND COOLING 1 - Set internal temperature display (driver’s side). 2 - Knob for adjusting internal tem- perature (driver’s side). 3 - Set internal temperature display (passenger’s side). 4 - Knob for adjusting internal tem- perature (passenger’s side). 5 - Buttons for selecting air distrib- ution. 6 - Buttons for adjusting fan speed. 7 - Set air distribution. 8 - Set fan speed 9 - Outside temperature (in degrees centigrade) 10 - Button for switching on/off maximum defrosting/demisting of windscreen and front side windows, heated rear window and external rearview mirrors. 11 - Button for switching on/off the P4T0038 heated rear window and the external fig. 102 rearview mirror defroster.

105 12 - Button for manual switching GENERAL The climate control system auto- on/off the air recirculation function. matically controls and adjusts the fol- The car is equipped with a double lowing parameters and functions: 13 - Button for switching on/off the climate control system governed by climate control system compressor an electronic control unit which sep- – temperature of air let into the pas- (where fitted). arately adjusts the temperature on senger compartment (separately on driver’s and passenger’s side. driver’s and passenger’s side) 14 - Button for aligning the set tem- peratures on passenger and driver’s For optimal control of temperature – fan speed (continuous variation) side. in the two areas of the passenger – air distribution compartment, the system is equipped 15 - Button for selecting automatic with a double sun ray sensor. – recirculation on/off system operation. The system features a pollution sen- – climate control system compressor 16 - Button for switching the system sor which can automatically switch on/off (where fitted). off. the air recirculation function on to re- duce the unpleasant effects of pol- The amount of air let into the pas- luted air in cities, queues, tunnels and senger compartment does not depend when the windscreen washer is oper- on the speed of the car. It is in fact ated (with the characteristic smell of adjusted by an electronically con- alcohol). trolled fan. The cooling system (whe- The air quality is controlled by an The following settings can be ad- re fitted) uses R134a re- justed manually: frigerating fluid as it will active carbon dust/pollen filter which not pollute the environment if it has the double function of mechani- – fan speed (continuous variation) cally filtering the particles dispersed accidentally leaks. Under no cir- – air distribution cumstances should other fluids be in the air and attenuating the peak used which are incompatible with accumulation of certain pollutants. – recirculation on/off the system components. – climate control system compressor on/off (where fitted).

106 IMPORTANT The manual settings windscreen, fan speed sufficient for In addition to this function, the fil- have priority over the automatic set- defogging and MAX-DEF function ac- ter efficaciously reduces the concen- tings until the user returns the system tivation in case of hard fogging. tration of pollutants thanks to a layer to automatic control. The manual set- of active carbon inside the filter. tings will be stored when the engine is The filtering action is carried out on stopped and represented at the fol- the air let in from outside (recircula- lowing start-up. tion off). The functions which cannot be set To guarantee sensor fog Have the filter checked at least once manually are always automatic. proper operation, license tag, parking disc or labels a year at a Lancia Dealership, ide- The air let into the passenger com- shall not be stuck on the “moni- ally at the beginning of summer. partment is always controlled auto- toring” area between sensor and You should have the filter checked matically (unless the system is off) ac- windscreen. Keep sensor and and if required replaced more fre- cording to the temperatures set on the windscreen clean, preventing any quently if the car is mainly used in driver’s and passenger’s displays. accumulation of dust or other sub- polluted or dusty areas. On certain versions (where pro- stances. vided), the system is completed by a sensor fog fitted behind the driving mirror and able to monitor a preset area relevant to windscreen internal surface and to operate the system au- Active carbon dust/pollen filter tomatically to prevent or to reduce fogging through the following opera- The filter has the specific capacity of tions: air recirculation opening, com- combining a mechanical air cleaning The efficacy of the cli- pressor activation, air distribution to action and an electrostatic effect so mate control system may that the air let into the passenger be considerably reduced if compartment is purified from parti- the filter is not replaced. cles such as dust, pollen, etc.

107 HOW TO USE THE CLIMATE – air recirculation function, to With one or more functions manu- CONTROL SYSTEM switch the function on and off con- ally on, the air temperature let into stantly the passenger compartment is auto- The system can be switched on the matically managed by the system un- – Z for faster window demisting/ various ways. We recommend start- less the climate control system com- defrosting ing by pressing the AUTO button and pressor is off (where fitted). In this setting the required temperatures on – ( for demisting/defrosting the condition, in fact, the air let into the the display. heated rear window and the external passenger compartment cannot have In this way, the system will start rearview mirrors. a lower temperature than that of the external air. working fully automatically to reach The temperature settings can be the required temperature as soon as changed at any time during auto- possible. It will maintain the temper- matic system operation. The system ature by adjusting the amount and will automatically adjust to the new distribution pattern of the air let into request. the passenger compartment and man- age the recirculation function and the Furthermore, the fan speed and the climate control system compressor air distribution pattern can be (where fitted). changed by means of the specific but- tons. In this way, the functions pass When the system is working auto- from automatic to manual control un- matically, the only possible manual til the AUTO button is pressed. functions are: – MONO, to align the passenger’s side temperature to the driver’s side temperature. – ECON, to switch the climate con- trol compressor off (where fitted)

108 CONTROLS (fig. 102) Turn the knobs fully to the right or – LO function (maximum cooling): to the left to the end positions HI and this is automatically switched on by Knob for adjusting air LO to obtain maximum heating or setting a temperature lower than temperature (2, 4 - fig. 102) cooling, respectively: 18°C on the display. It can be inde- pendently switched on from driver’s – HI function (maximum heating): Turn the knobs towards the right or side or from passenger’s side or from this is switched on by setting a tem- towards the left to raise or lower the both sides (also by selecting the perature higher than 32°C on the dis- air temperature required respectively MONO function). This function can play. It can be independently switched in the left-hand area (knob 2) and in be switched on to speed up cooling on from driver’s side or from passen- the right-hand area (knob 4) of the the passenger compartment by ex- ger’s side or from both sides (also by passenger compartment. The set tem- ploiting the system potential to the selecting the MONO function). This peratures are shown on the displays 1 maximum. The function cuts out the function can be switched on to speed and 3 over the respective knobs. heater and switches the air recircula- up heating in the passenger compart- tion and the climate control compres- Press button 14 (MONO) to auto- ment by exploiting the system poten- sor (where fitted) on. The air distrib- matically align the passenger’s side tial to the maximum. The function ution and the fan speed are selected temperature to the temperature on employs the maximum coolant tem- according to the environmental con- driver’s side. Consequently, the tem- perature while the air distribution and ditions. All the manually settings can perature in the two areas can be set fan speed are set by the system ac- be adjusted when the function is on. simply by turning the knob on dri- cording to environmental conditions. To switch the function off, simply set ver’s side 2. This function is provided In particular, if the coolant tempera- the temperature on the display to a to facilitate adjusting the temperature ture is not sufficient, the function value higher than 18°C. in the passenger compartment when does not switch the fan on at top only the driver is present. speed to limit letting into air which is The separate operation of the set not adequately warm. All the manu- temperatures is automatically reset ally settings can be adjusted when the when knob 4 is turned. function is on. To switch the function off, simply set the temperature on the display to a value lower than 32°C.

109 p Buttons for adjusting Buttons for adjusting air QAir flow shared between the fan speed (6 - fig. 102) distribution (5 - fig. 102) footwell vents and the windscreen and front side window defrosting/demi-sting Press the upper or lower button to Press buttons 5 to manually select vents. increase or decrease the fan speed, re- one of the five possible air distribu- spectively, so to adjust the amount of tion patterns in the passenger com- This air distribution pattern ensures air let into the passenger compart- partment: a good heating of the passenger com- ment while keeping the required tem- partment and prevents possible mist- perature constant. OAir flow to central and side da- ing up. The fan speed is indicated by the shboard vents and the rear vent. ü bars which light up on the display 8. M Air flow to windscreen and front Repeatedly press the upper button to Air flow shared between foot-well side window vents for demisting or de- switch the fan on at top speed (all vents (warmer air) and central and frosting the windows. bars on). Repeatedly press the lower side dashboard vents and the rear button to switch off the fan (no bars vent (cooler air). IMPORTANT The system will not accept different combinations. If an on). This air distribution pattern is par- air distribution pattern will cannot be ticularly useful in the middle seasons used is selected only the main func- IMPORTANT In versions with cool- (spring and autumn) when it is tion of the pressed button will be ing system (where fitted), the fan can sunny. only be switched off when the climate started. control system compressor is switched NAir flow to the front and rear The set air distribution pattern is off with the ECON button. footwells. shown on display 7. Press the AUTO button to restore The air distribution pattern, due to When a combined function is set, automatic fan speed control after a the natural tendency of heat to move only the main function of the button manual setting. upwards, allows to heat the passenger pressed will be switched on. If the compartment up as fast as possible. button corresponding to a function Furthermore, it offers a prompt feel- which is already on is pressed, the ing of warmth to the coolest parts of function will continue to work. the body.

110 Press the AUTO button to restore air The LED on the AUTO button will The air let into the passenger com- distribution control after a manual go out and the automatic recircula- partment cannot be cooled when the setting. tion function will be switched off (to compressor is off. Consequently: prevent possible misting up) when the – if the outside temperature is lower climate control system compressor is AUTO button (automatic than the set temperature, the system switched off. operation) (15 - fig. 102) works normally and can reach and maintain the set temperature also Press the AUTO button: the system IMPORTANT Air at a temperature when the compressor is off. will automatically control the air lower than that of the outside air can- amount and distribution pattern in not be let in to the passenger com- – if the outside temperature is higher the passenger compartment and can- partment when the compressor is off. than the set temperature, the system cel all the previously made settings. Furthermore, in particular environ- cannot reach the required tempera- The LED on the button will come on. mental conditions, the windows could ture. This will be signalled by flash- When the LED on the AUTO button mist up fast because the air is no ing the external temperature value on is off, one or more manual settings longer dehumidified. display 1 and 3. have been made. Consequently, either The setting will be stored when the the automatic control is not complete engine is stopped. Either press the MONO button (set temperature (with the exception of the tempera- ECON button again or press the alignment) (14 - fig. 102) ture control function which is always AUTO button to reset automatic con- Press the MONO button to auto- automatic) or the system is off (LED trol of the compressor (in the latter matically align the passenger’s side on the OFF button will be on in this case, the manual settings will be can- temperature to the temperature on case). celled). The LED on the ECON but- driver’s side. Consequently, the tem- ton will go out. perature in the two areas can be set ECON button (climate control simply by turning the knob on dri- system compressor off) The automatic compressor is auto- matically switched on when the air ver’s side 2. This function is provided (where fitted) (13 - fig. 102) recirculation function is switched on to facilitate adjusting the temperature Press the ECON button to switch the automatically (to prevent the win- in the passenger compartment when climate control system compressor dows from misting up). only the driver is present. off. The LED on the button will come on.

111 The separate set temperature func- The air recirculation button LED IMPORTANT The air recirculation tion will be automatically reset when will stay off when the recirculation function will allow, according to the the passenger turns knob 4. function is automatically controlled system operation (i.e. heating or cool- by the system (consequently, the ac- ing) to reach the required conditions tual on/off status of the recirculation faster. We recommend not turning Air recirculation on/off function will not be displayed). this function on manually on rainy button (12 - fig. 102) and/or cold days as this will consid- During automatic operation, the re- erably increase window misting, es- The air recirculation function is con- circulation function is automatically pecially if there are many people on trolled according to three strategies: switched on when the pollution sen- board. – automatic operation (LED on but- sor detects the presence of polluted ton off) air, e.g. in cities, queues, tunnels and during windscreen operation (due to – forced ventilation on (recirculation the characteristic smell of alcohol). always on) - the green LED on the button will come on When the recirculation function is controlled manually (green LED = re- – forced ventilation off (recirculation circulation on; amber LED = external The climate control sys- always off, air taken in from the out- air taken in), the LED on the auto tem compressor cannot side) - the amber LED on the button button will come on if all the other work when the outside will come on functions (air distribution, air flow, temperature is lower than approx- The three conditions are obtained by etc.) are controlled automatically by imately 5°C. In these conditions, pressing the air recirculation button the system. In the same way, recircu- the system automatically opens the (12) in sequence. lation will be controlled by the user air recirculation (amber LED on). when the AUTO button is pressed. You can switch recirculation back to automatic (LED off) or override it closed (green LED on). You are advised not to use this function since the windows could mist up rapidly when the outside temper- ature is low.

112 IMPORTANT If the engine is not screen, fan speed sufficient for defog- MAX Button for fast windscreen adequately warm, the fan will not im- ging and MAX-DEF function activation demisting/defrosting mediately be started at top speed to in case of hard fogging. (10 - fig. 102) limit letting cold air into the passen- Press this button: the climate control ger compartment for demisting the system will automatically (for ap- windows. proximately 180 seconds) switch on Only the fan speed can be adjusted all the functions required for fast and the heated rear window can be To guarantee sensor fog windscreen and side window demist- switched off when the fast demist- proper operation, license ing/defrosting regardless of the sys- ing/defrosting function is on. tag, parking disc or labels tem operation conditions, that is: shall not be stuck on the “moni- Press the fast demisting/defrosting toring” area between sensor and – climate control system compressor button again or the air circulation windscreen. Keep sensor and on (where fitted) button, ECON, AUTO or OFF to windscreen clean, preventing any accumulation of dust or other sub- – air recirculation off (if on) switch the fast demisting/defrosting function off and reset the previous stances. – maximum air temperature (HI) on system operation conditions as well as both displays the last set function. IMPORTANT Defogging procedure is activated by turning the ignition – maximum fan speed On certain versions the system is key to MAR or depressing the AUTO completed by a sensor fog fitted be- – air flow directed to the windscreen button. This procedure can be deac- hind the driving mirror and able to tivated by depressing the following and front side window vents monitor a section of the windscreen buttons: compressor, air recirculation, – heated rear window and external internal surface and to operate the distribution, air flow. This operation system automatically to prevent or to rearview mirrors on. inhibits the sensor signal as long as remove inside fogging from wind- the AUTO button is pressed again or, The LED on the heated rear window screen and front side windows under some conditions, the ignition button and the amber LED on the air through the following operations: air key is turned to MAR again. recirculation button will come on recirculation opening, compressor ac- when the fast demisting/defrosting tivation, air distribution to wind- function is on. The ECON, AUTO and OFF LEDS, on the other hand, will go out.

113 – air recirculation, ECON and AUTO Press the OFF button again to Button for button LEDs off switch the climate control system demisting/defrosting the heated back on without changing the previ- – central display off, except for the rear window and external ous settings. outside air temperature value rearview mirrors (11 - fig. 102) Press the AUTO button to switch the – air recirculation on, thus isolating Press this button to switch on the climate control system back on and the passenger compartment heated rear window and external ensure a totally automatic control. rearview mirror demisting/defrosting – climate control system compressor function. The LED on the button will (where fitted) off come on. ICE BUZZER – fan off. The device will be automatically The climate control system is The heated rear window can be switched off after ten minutes. equipped with a buzzer which sounds switched on and off normally when (three consecutive buzzes) when the Press the button again or stop the the system is off. outside temperature reach or drops engine to switch the function off. It below 3°C to warn the driver of pos- will not start up automatically when IMPORTANT The windows may sible ice. the engine is started again. mist up fast when the climate control system is off and in certain environ- The buzzer will sound only once un- IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers mental conditions. less the outside temperature exceeds on the electrical filaments inside the 7°C. This will reactivate the system The climate control system elec- heated rear window to prevent dam- warning (after approximately 15 mi- tronic control unit stores the system age. nutes). In this case, if the outside tem- settings made before the system was perature reaches or drops below 3°C switched off and restores them as again, the buzzer will be sounded. OFF button (system off) soon as a button is pressed (with the (16 - fig. 102) exception of the heated rear window Press the OFF button to switch the button). The function which the but- climate control system off. The LED ton corresponds to will be switched on the button will come on. on, if it was off when the system was switched off. It will be kept if, on the The climate control system condi- other hand, it was on when the sys- tions when the system is off are: tem was switched off.

114 SUPPLEMENTARY HEATER STEERING (jtd versions only - where fitted) COLUMN STALKS The supplementary heater comple- IMPORTANT The operation of the ments engine coolant heating imme- heater according to engine coolant LEFT-HAND STALK diately after start up and when trav- temperature consequently can be cut This stalk groups the outside light elling to reach the optional engine op- out or reduced according to the bat- and the direction indicator controls. eration temperature and to heat the tery voltage. The outside lights will only light up passenger compartment faster. At the end of the operation cycle de- when the ignition key is at MAR. The electrical device is fully auto- veloped according to the temperature When the outside lights are turned matic and will only work when the of the engine coolant and the battery on, the instrument panel and the var- engine is running. voltage, the supplementary heater is ious controls located on the dash- automatically switched off. It will not board light up. IMPORTANT The supplementary come on again until the following en- heater will be switched on when the gine start-up, even if the coolant tem- Side and taillights (fig. 103) outside temperature is lower than perature drops to under 65°C. These come on when you turn ring 15°C and the engine coolant temper- å 6 ature is lower than 65°C. A from to . Instrument panel in- dicator light 3 will light up. To prevent excessive intake of bat- tery current, the heater operation at the various power percentages is sub- jected to the power voltage measured P4T0023 by the control unit.

fig. 103 115 Dipped beam headlights (fig. 103) Direction indicators (fig. 105) To flash the lights (fig. 106) These come on when you turn ring Move the stalk as follows: Pull the stalk towards the steering A from 6 to 2. wheel (temporary position). Instru- up - to switch on the right-hand in- ment panel warning light 1 will dicators Main beam headlights (fig. 104) come on. down - to switch on the left-hand in- These come on when you turn the 2 dicators. IMPORTANT This operation will ring to pushing the stalk forwards flash the main beam headlights. Fol- Instrument panel warning light Ÿ towards the dashboard. Instrument low the Highway Code to prevent be- 1 or Δ will flash. panel warning light will come on. ing fined. To return to dipped beams, pull the The direction indicators automati- stalk back towards the steering wheel. cally return to the neutral position when the car straightens up. If you want the indicator to flash briefly to show that you are about to change lane, move the stalk up or down with- out clicking into position. When you let it go it will return to its original position. P4T0025 P4T0024 P4T0026

fig. 104 fig. 105 fig. 106 116 RIGHT-HAND STALK In versions with rain sensor, turn Windscreen washer ring A to set the sensitivity level: This stalk groups together all the When you pull the lever towards the washer/wiper controls. AUTO = automatic sensitivity set- steering wheel (fig. 108) a jet of liq- ting uid shoots out from the windscreen Windscreen wiper/washer ■ = low sensitivity washer and the windscreen wiper will be operated for a few seconds and, af- (fig. 107) ■■ = medium sensitivity ter a pause of approximately five sec- This device can only work when the ■■■ = high sensitivity onds, will flick once again. If on the ignition key is at MAR. other hand the windscreen wiper is 2 - Slow continuous wipe 0 - Windscreen wiper off. working it will fast flick several times. 3 - Fast continuous wipe 1 - Flick wipe. In this position, turn Headlight washer (where fitted) knob A to set the following (with the 4 - Temporary fast function: when exception of versions with rain sen- you release the stalk it returns to po- Pulling the stalk towards the steer- sor): sition 0 and automatically turns the ing wheel (fig. 108) will also operate windscreen wiper off. ■ the headlight washers providing that = Slow flick the dipped or main beam headlights ■■ = Medium flick are on (fig. 109). ■■■ = Medium-fast flick ■■■■ = Fast flick. P4T0642 P4T0643 P4T0273

fig. 107 fig. 108 fig. 109 117 Rain sensor (where fitted) The rain sensor is switched off when CONTROLS the key is turned to STOP. It will not The rain sensor is an electronic de- come on again at the following engine vice combined with the windscreen start-up (key at MAR) if the stalk is HAZARD LIGHTS (fig. 110) wiper which automatically suits the at position 1. flick frequency during operation to These come on when switch A is the intensity of rain. Turn ring A (fig. 107) to set the rain pressed regardless of the position of sensor sensitivity level: the ignition key. All the functions controlled with the right-hand stalk (i.e. on/off, continu- AUTO = automatic sensitivity set- When these lights are on, the switch ous slow and fast wipe, temporary ting and the ŸΔ warning lights on the in- fast wipe, windscreen washer and strument panel flash. ■ = low sensitivity headlight washer) are unvaried. Press the switch again to turn the ■■ = medium sensitivity The rain sensor is automatically lights off. switched on when the stalk is taken to ■■■ = high sensitivity. position 1 (fig. 107) and has the pur- IMPORTANT The use of the haz- pose of adjusting the range of opera- ard warning lights is governed by the tion from stationary (no flick) when traffic regulations of the country the windscreen is dry to second con- where the car is being driven. These tinuous speed (continuous fast wipe) laws should be complied with. when the rain is heavy. When the windscreen washer is op- erated and the rain sensor is on (by taking the stalk to position 1), the P4T0712 normal washing cycle is carried out after which the rain sensor returns to normal automatic operation.

fig. 110 118 FRONT FOG LIGHTS (fig. 111) REAR FOG LIGHT (fig. 112) IMPORTANT The rear fog light may annoy the drivers following you Press button A to switch the fog This light is switched on by pressing when visibility is good. Consequently, lights on (only when the outside lights button A when the dipped beam use the light only when required. are on). headlights and/or front fog lights are on. The LED on the button will come IMPORTANT Follow the local pre- on. The LED on the button will come on. scriptions governing the use of rear fog lights. The rear fog light system The fog lights will be automatically The rear fog light will automatically complies with EEC/ECE standards. switched off when the ignition key is be switched off when the engine is turned to STOP and will not come on stopped or when switching from again when the engine is started un- dipped beam headlights and/or front INSTRUMENT DIMMER (fig. 113) fog lights to side/taillights. less button A is pressed. Turn ring A upwards or downward Press the button again to switch the Press the button to switch the lights when the outside lights are on to re- light on after starting the engine again off. spectively increase or decrease instru- or switching to dipped beam head- ment brightness. lights in the fog. IMPORTANT The use of fog lights is governed by the Highway Code. You will need to press the button to The fog light system complies with switch the rear fog light on again af- EEC/ECE standards. ter stopping the engine or switching the dipped beam headlights on. P4T0039 P4T0040 P4T0713

fig. 111 fig. 112 fig. 113 119 HEATED REAR WINDOW FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH If, after an accident, you (fig. 114) (fig. 115) can smell petrol or see that the fuel feed system is Press button A to switch the heated This is a safety cut-off switch which leaking, to avoid the risk of fire, do rear window on. The LED on the but- comes into operation in the case of an not reset the switch. ton will come on. accident to block the supply of fuel thereby stopping the engine. It also The device will be automatically prevents spilling fuel if the lines are switched off after ten minutes. broken in the accident. The electrical rearview mirror de- The safety switch will operate - in mister will also be switched on auto- the event of an impact - the central If you cannot see any fuel leaks and matically. door locking system (if locked) to al- the car is in a fit state to continue its low opening the doors from the out- journey, press button A to reactivate side. the fuel supply system. After the crash, remember to turn the ignition key to STOP to prevent HANDBRAKE (fig. 116) the battery running down. The handbrake lever is located be- tween the two front seats. Pull the handbrake lever upwards until the car cannot be moved. Four or five clicks are generally enough P4T0008 P4T0041 when the car is on level ground while nine or ten may be required if the car is on a steep slope or laden. IMPORTANT If this is not the case, take the car to a Lancia Dealership to have the handbrake adjusted. fig. 114 fig. 115 120 When the handbrake lever is pulled MANUAL GEARBOX To change gear properly up and the ignition key is at MAR the you must push the clutch x panel warning light will come on. To engage the gears, press down the pedal fully down. It is therefore essential that there is To release the handbrake: clutch and put the gear lever into one of the positions shown in the diagram nothing under the pedals: make 1) Slightly lift the handbrake and in fig. 117 (the diagram is also on the sure mats are lying flat and do not press release button A. gear lever knob). get in the way of the pedals. Make sure mats are lying flat and do not 2) Keep the button pressed in and x To engage reverse (R): wait for the get in the way of the pedals. lower the lever. Warning light will car to come to a standstill and from go out. neutral position shift the lever to the 3) To prevent accidental movement right and then back. Reverse can only be en- of the car, this procedure should be In some versions, lift ring A (fig. gaged when the car is at a carried out with the brake pedal 117) under the knob with the fingers standstill. Wait for two pressed down. of the hand operating the lever. Re- seconds or longer with the clutch lease the ring after engaging reverse. pedal fully pressed before engag- You do not need to lift the ring to ing reverse when the engine is shift to another gear from reverse. running to prevent scraping and damaging the gears.

P4T0055 P4T0031 Do not drive with your hand resting on the gear stick as the force exerted, even if only slight, could lead to premature wearing of the gearbox internal components. fig. 116 fig. 117 121 CRUISE CONTROL (where fitted)) ing light D will come on when the de- vice starts governing the engine. Ring B is used to set and maintain the car speed or decrease the set GENERAL The cruise control must speed. only be used when the The electronic cruise control allows traffic and road conditions Turn ring B to position (+) to set the to drive your car at the required speed allow to keep a constant speed in speed reached or to increase the without pressing the accelerator total safety for an adequately long stored speed. pedal. This reduces fatigue when dri- time. ving on motorways because the set Turn ring B to position (–) to de- speed is automatically maintained. crease the stored speed. The speed will be increased or de- IMPORTANT The device can only The device is automatically switched creased by approximately 1 km/h be set to speeds exceeding 30 km/h. off when: each time ring B is operated. Hold the ring turned to set the speed continu- – the brake pedal is pressed ously. The new set speed will be au- – the clutch pedal is pressed. tomatically kept. Button C allows to reset the stored CONTROLS (fig. 118) value. The cruise control is operated by means of switch A, ring B and but- IMPORTANT Turn the ignition key to STOP or switch A to OFF to delete P4T0307 ton C. the stored speed and switch the sys- Switch A has two position: tem off. – OFF: in this position, the device is off; – ON: this is the normal device op- erating position. The CRUISE warn- fig. 118 122 Storing the speed Resetting the stored speed Increasing the stored speed Move switch A to ON and take the To reset the stored speed after The stored speed can be increased in car to the required speed normally. switching the device off, e.g. by press- two ways: Turn ring B to (+) for all least three ing the brake or the clutch pedal: – by pressing the accelerator pedal seconds and release it. The car speed – accelerate progressively to reach a and storing the new speed (turning will be stored and you can now re- speed which is close to the previously ring B for longer than three seconds); lease your foot from the accelerator. set speed or The car will continue at constant – engage the gear which was en- speed until one of the following events – by temporarily turning ring B to gaged when the speed was set (4th or occur: (+): each turn of the ring will corre- 5th gear) spond to a small speed increase (ap- – the brake pedal is pressed – press button C. proximately 1 kph) while a continu- – the clutch pedal is pressed. ous pressure will correspond to a con- tinuous increase of speed. Release ring IMPORTANT If required (e.g. for B: the new speed will automatically overtaking) you can accelerate simply be stored. by pressing the accelerator. The car will return to the previously set speed when the accelerator pedal is released.

123 Reducing the stored speed When driving with the If the device is faulty or cruise control, do not shift does not work, turn switch The stored speed can be decreased the gear lever to neutral. A off and contact a Lancia in two ways: You should only switch the cruise Dealership after checking the pro- – by switching the device off (e.g. by control on when the traffic and tection fuse. pressing the brake pedal) and then road conditions allow this in com- Switch A can be left on without storing the new speed (turning ring B plete safety, i.e. straight and dry damaging the device. The device to (+) for longer than three seconds); roads, motorways, fast moving should however be switched off traffic and smooth road surface. when not in use by turning switch or Do not use the device is cities or in A off to prevent accidentally stor- – by turning ring B to (–) until the heavy traffic. ing speeds. new speed is reached. The new speed will automatically be stored.

Deleting the stored speed The stored speed is automatically The cruise control can be deleted when: switched on at speeds – the engine is stopped higher than 30 km/h. The device can only be switched on in or 4th or 5th gear, according to car – switch A is turned to OFF. speed. When travelling down- hill the speed may increase slightly with respect to the stored value ac- cording to the change in engine load.

124 INTERIOR The lights will go out when the igni- The lights will go out automatically tion switch is turned to MAR (doors after a few seconds if a door is left EQUIPMENT closed). open. Simply open a door to switch the lights on again. Switch A in central position 1: the INTERIOR LIGHTS lights will not come on (OFF posi- tion). Courtesy lights (fig. 120) Front ceiling light (fig. 119) Press switch A to the right (position Lower the sun visors to access the courtesy lights on the roof. The ceiling light includes two cour- 2): both light will come on regardless tesy lights and the respective switch. of the doors. The courtesy lights allow to use the courtesy mirrors in the dark. Both lights will come on when a Switch B is will switch the lights on door is opened along with the rear separately. Press lens A at the indent to switch ceiling lights when the switch A is Press switch B to the left (position the lights on and off with the key at pressed to the left (position 0 - 1) to switch on the left-hand light. MAR . AUTO). Press the switch to the right (position The lights will stay on for approxi- 2) to switch on the right-hand light. mately seven seconds or until the ig- The lights will not come on when nition key is turned to MAR (with the switch B is in central position 0. doors closed) to facilitate starting the car. IMPORTANT Before getting out of the car, make sure that the switch A is pressed to the left and switch B is P4T0057 in central position. In this way, the P4T0058 ceiling lights will then go out when the doors are closed and you will not drain the battery.

fig. 119 fig. 120 125 Rear ceiling lamps (fig. 121) GLOVE COMPARTMENT Versions without lock: The ceiling lamps light on/off grad- (fig. 122-123) – to open, simply pull handle A. ually when opening/closing a door. According to versions, the glove For both versions, a courtesy light B Manual on/off switching is obtained compartment located in the dash- will come on when the compartment, by pressing lens A in the point indi- board can be fitted with a lock. if any, is opened. cated by the arrows. Versions with lock: – to lock/unlock, use the ignition key; – to open, turn the ignition key to position 1, then pull handle A. Never drive with the glove – to lock, close the lid and turn the compartment flap open: it key to position 2. could injure the person sitting in the passenger seat in the event of an accident. P4T0714 P4T0715 P4T0716

fig. 121 fig. 122 fig. 123 126 FRONT ASHTRAY AND CIGAR The cigar lighter gets very REAR ASHTRAY (fig. 126) hot. Be careful how you LIGHTER (fig. 124-125) An ashtray for rear seats is located handle it and make sure it in the rear part of the central unit. The ashtray and cigar lighter are is not used by children: danger of protected by a single flap. Press the fire or burns. Pull the ashtray out to use it. flap at point A to open. To remove the ashtray, press the Press button B to work the cigar middle clip A and pull the ashtray lighter. After approximately 15 sec- out. onds it will return to its initial posi- tion and be ready for use. Remove tray C to empty the ashtray. To put it back, insert the base of the ashtray, press the middle clip and IMPORTANT The cigar lighter will push it into its housing. only work when the ignition key is at MAR.

Make sure that the cigar lighter does in fact pop out after it has been pushed in. P4T0062 P4T0064 P4T0065

fig. 124 fig. 125 fig. 126 127 CARD HOLDER (fig. 127) COIN TRAY (fig. 129) SUN VISORS (fig. 130) The card holder is located in the The tray A is located in the central The sun visors can swing up or centre of the dashboard. dashboard unit. down or be pivoted sideways. To open: press the front and release. Release the visors from hooks A to The card holder will open automati- move them sideways. cally. A courtesy mirror with sliding cover Push if fully to close the holder. B and light C is fitted on the back of the sun visors (for details on the CUP/CAN HOLDER (fig. 128) lights, see “Courtesy lights” in this chapter). The holder is located in the centre of the dashboard. To open: press the P4T0067 front and release. The cup/can holder will open automatically. Push it fully to close the holder.

fig. 128 P4T0066 P4T0068 P4T0069

fig. 127 fig. 129 fig. 130 128 ODDMENT COMPARTMENTS Rear oddment compartment Door pockets (fig. 134) (fig. 133) Pockets A are located on the front Oddment compartments on the An oddment compartment A can be door panels. dashboard (fig. 131-132) found in the rear part of the central There is a central compartment A dashboard unit. (with light) and a side compartment B on the dashboard. P4T0063

fig. 131 P4T0070 P4T0071 P4T0072

fig. 132 fig. 133 fig. 134 129 PAPER POCKETS (fig. 135) HANDLES (fig. 136) FRONT ARMREST (fig. 137) Paper pockets are located on the A handle is located over the front The armrest can be adjusted up or back of the front seats. passenger side door. down. Two handles A with clothes hook B To use the armrest, lower it as are over the rear doors. shown in the figure. The handles are equipped with a de- An oddment compartment is con- vice which gradually and progres- cealed inside the armrest. Press but- sively takes them back to home posi- ton A to lift the cover. tion. IMPORTANT When the armrest has been lifted completely, take care not to accidentally press button A, otherwise you will open the object tray cover and the contents will fall out. P4T0074 P4T0717 P4T0808

fig. 135 fig. 136 fig. 137 130 POWER SOCKET (fig. 138) SUNROOF (where fitted) OPENING AND CLOSING (where fitted) (fig. 139-140) The sunroof is electrically operated. It is located on the rear part of the It will only work when the ignition Button A on the ceiling light unit central dashboard panel. Open cover key is at MAR. controls the opening, closing, raising A to use the socket. and lowering of the roof. The socket is powered when the key When you release the button, the is turned to MAR. It can be used only roof locks in the position it is in at for accessories with a maximum in- that moment. take of 15A (power 180W). Improper use of the sun- Press the back of the button to open roof can be dangerous. Be- the roof and the front to close. fore and during its opera- Do not use the socket for tion ensure that any passengers in power devices with a the car are not at risk from the higher intake. Prolonged moving roof either by personal ob- current intake can drain the bat- jects getting caught in the mecha- tery and lead to problems when nism or by being injured by it di- starting the engine. rectly. Always remove the ignition key when you get out of the car to prevent the sunroof being operated accidentally and constituting a danger to the people left in the car. P4T0316 P4T0076

Do not open the sunroof if there is snow or ice on it: you may damage the mechanism. fig. 138 fig. 139 131 A small spoiler B will be lifted when Regularly check that the SLIDING SUNSHADE (fig. 141) the roof is opened to direct the flow of side holes C for draining A sliding sunshade is fitted to lessen air. water are free. the effect of sun rays in the passenger compartment when the sunroof is closed or partially open. Use handle A to open and close the sunshade by hand. IMPORTANT With ignition key at STOP, sunroof open is indicated by a The sunshade slides back into the timed buzzer sounding when opening roof when the sunroof when it is com- a front door. pletely opened. When the roof is closed, the sun- shade slides out partially to make the handle accessible. P4T0077 P4T0078

fig. 140 fig. 141 132 SPOILER POSITION (fig. 142) EMERGENCY PROCEDURE Insert the screwdriver in C and turn it. In this way, you can manually open The rear part of the sunroof can only (fig. 143-144) and close the sunroof. be raised when the roof is completely If there is an electrical fault in the closed. Press the front part of button sunroof, remove cover A from the When the roof is in the required po- A (fig. 139). front ceiling light using the screw- sition, turn the screwdriver half a turn backwards until you hear a click. Press the back part of the button to driver provided as a lever in point B. Then remove the screwdriver. close the back of the roof.

IMPORTANT With ignition key at STOP, sunroof open is indicated by a timed buzzer sounding when opening a front door. P4T0079 P4T0081 P4T0080

fig. 142 fig. 143 fig. 144 133 DOORS IMPORTANT The electronic alarm Pull the handle B to open the door. (where fitted) will not be switched on All doors are unlocked when a front by locking the door with the key in door handle is operated. CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING the lock. SYSTEM A light C (where fitted) is located near each door handle to make it easy From the inside (fig. 147-148) From the outside to find the handle in the dark. When the doors are closed press (to Close the doors and either press but- lock) or lift (to unlock) one of the ton A (fig. 145) on the key grip or in- front door sill buttons A. sert and turn the key in the driver's door lock. The rear door sill buttons will lock and unlock only that particular door.

To unlock, turn the key to position P4T0083 1 (fig. 146). The rear doors can only be opened from the inside when the child locks To lock, turn the key to position 2. are not engaged. To open the door, lift the handle.

fig. 147 P4T0801 P4T0802 P4T0084

fig. 145 fig. 146 fig. 148 134 IMPORTANT If one of the doors is IMPORTANT After engaging the PUDDLE LIGHTS (fig. 150) not shut properly or there is a failure lock, check by trying to open a rear The puddle lights are fitted in the in the system, the central door lock- door with the internal handle. lower part of the front door panels to ing system will not work and after illuminate the ground. some attempts the device stops work- ing for about two minutes. In these These lights will come on with the two minutes, the doors can be locked front ceiling lights. or unlocked manually without the electrical system coming into play. Af- ter the two minutes, the control unit is ready to receive commands once Always use the lock when again. If the cause of the failure is re- transporting children. This moved, the device will start working will prevent them opening properly, otherwise it will cut out once a door by themselves when travel- more. ling.

CHILD LOCK (fig. 149) To prevent opening the rear doors from the inside. Engage by inserting the tip of the ig- nition key in A to turn the lock. Position 1 - engaged. P4T0803 P4T0073 Position 2 - disengaged. The device will be engaged even if the doors are unlocked by means of the centralised system.

fig. 149 fig. 150 135 ELECTRIC WINDOWS Should the battery be Front electrical window winders disconnected or a dedi- Front and rear electric windows are (fig. 151) cated fuse be replaced, provided with anti-crushing safety de- reinitialise the anti-crushing safety The electrical window winders are vice. When the system control unit de- device proceeding as follows: controlled by buttons located on the tects an obstacle in the last 20 cm of door panel on driver’s side. They work the window closing travel, it makes 1) lower completely the driver’s when the ignition key is at MAR: the window travel stop and reverse window keeping the control button immediately. depressed for at least 3 seconds af- A - front left-hand window ter it has reached the end of its B - front right-hand window IMPORTANT Should all the power travel; windows be operated at the same time C - rear left-hand window 2) release the control button then when closing there could be a stroke close the window completely keep- D - rear right-hand window inversion of one of them. It is there- ing the button pulled up for at fore suggested to check that closure is E - switch to disable rear electrical least 3 seconds after the window performed. window winders. has reached the end of its travel; 3) proceed in the same way for all the other windows avoiding to per- form these operations on more than one window at the same time. At the end of this procedure the To prevent system mal- system is reset to its original oper- ating conditions, otherwise contact

functioning, do not keep P4T0263 the control buttons pressed a Lancia Dealership as soon as when the window has reached the possible. end of its travel.

fig. 151 136 IMPORTANT The front window Rear electrical window winders Improper use of the elec- winders can be operated for five min- (fig. 152) trical window winders can utes after the key is turned to STOP be dangerous. Before and (and not extracted) with the doors A button to operate the respective during their operation ensure that closed. window in located in each rear door any passengers in the car are not handle. at risk from the moving glass ei- The rear window winder controls ther by personal objects getting will be disabled when switch E is up. Pull the button to wind the window up or press it to wind the window caught in the mechanism or by be- Pull up or press the control button down. ing injured by it directly. Always to activate automatic closing or open- remove the ignition key when you ing: the window will stop when it Switches C and D (fig. 151) operate get out of the car to prevent the reaches the end of its travel (or when the rear window windows from the electrical window winders being the button is pressed again). driver’s seat. operated accidentally and consti- Switch E (fig. 151) disables the con- tuting a danger to the people left in trols on door handles when the switch the car. A short pulse results in a short win- is up. dow movement.

Should there be a failure in the anti-crushing safety

system, automatic window P4T0262 operation (both closing and open- ing) is excluded. Contact a Lancia Dealership as soon as possible.

The door handle on the passenger side has a switch to control that par- ticular window. fig. 152 137 BOOT When using the boot, OPENING THE BOOT WITH THE make sure the load you are REMOTE CONTROL carrying does not ex-ceed Lift switch A (fig. 153) on the base The boot can be opened from the out- of the driver seat or turn the key in the maximum allowed weight (see the “Technical specifications” side by pressing the button D (fig. 155) lock B (fig. 154) to position 1 to open on the ignition key grip. the boot. chapter). Also ensure the items in the boot are arranged properly The boot can be opened also when The boot is locked when the boot is and fastened with straps to the the central door locking system and closed. specific hooks to prevent them be- the electronic alarm (where fitted) are ing thrown forwards and injuring Use handle C to open the boot. on. passengers should you brake The floor mat can be reversed. Re- sharply. In this case, the alarm system im- move it and turn it over with the plements the following strategy: washable side facing up when carry- – volumetric protection off ing dirty loads. – anti-lift sensor off – boot sensor off. The surveillance functions will be re- stored when the boot is closed. P4T0249 P4T0087 P4T0804

fig. 153 fig. 154 fig. 155 138 EXTENDING THE BOOT To totally extend the boot To extend the boot This is only possible in versions with (fig. 158) 1) Pull handle A (fig. 159) located split rear seats. Fold both side of the seat to obtain in the middle of each cushion in the See the specific chapter for instruc- maximum boot capacity. direction of travel and fold it forwards tions for the Station Wagon version. in the direction of the arrow. The split rear seat allows to partially 2) Remove the head restraints from or totally extend the boot (one third, the rear seat (see “Head restraints” in two thirds, or totally). this chapter) and insert them in the housings on the cushion (fig. 160). To partially extend the boot (one third) (fig. 156) 3) Turn the lever (fig. 161) on the

P4T0089 rear window shelf to release the seat Fold the left-hand seat only. You back lock. can sit two passengers in the rear seat on the right-hand side. position 1 = right-hand seat back To partially extend the boot position 2 = left-hand seat back. (two thirds) (fig. 157) Fold the right-hand seat only. You can sit one passenger in the rear seat on the left-hand side. fig. 157 P4T0088 P4T0090 P4T0091

fig. 156 fig. 158 fig. 159 139 4) Lift the seat belts sideways and IMPORTANT If there is a fairly ANCHORING THE LOAD tilt the seat back forwards as to ob- heavy load in the boot and you are (fig. 162-163-164) tain a single load platform with the travelling at night, it is a good idea to floor of the boot. check and adjust the height of the The load can be secured with belts dipped beam headlights (see “Head- attached to the specific rings in the boot corners. To return the seats to their lights” in this chapter). normal position The rings can also be used to fasten the luggage net (optional, can be pur- 1) Move the seat belt sideways and chased at a Lancia Dealership). bring the seat back to an upright po- sition. Check that it has caught prop- erly. 2) Tip the cushion back and make sure that the seat belt webbing is not twisted in the hidden stretches be- tween the cushions and the seat back. 3) Refit the head restraints. P4T0737 P4T0092 P4T0093

fig. 160 fig. 161 fig. 162 140 Heavy loads which are SKI TUNNEL (fig. 165) BONNET not securely anchored The ski tunnel can be used to trans- could seriously injure pas- port long objects (e.g. skis). Introduce To open the bonnet: sengers in the event of an accident. objects into the tunnel from the boot. 1) Pull the red lever A (fig. 166) in 1) Lower the armrest A. the direction of the arrow. 2) Press handle B and lower flap C. 3) Remove the cover (where fitted). This should only be done Push flap C towards the boot to when the car is stationary. close it. It will lock automatically. P4T0094

2) Lift lever B (fig. 167) and release the bonnet from the safety retainer. 3) Lift the bonnet. fig. 163 P4T0095 P4T0200 P4T0096

fig. 164 fig. 165 fig. 166 141 IMPORTANT The bonnet is lifted If repairs need to be car- To close the bonnet: by two gas struts (fig. 168). Do not ried out inside the engine 1) Lower the bonnet until it is about tamper with the struts and follow the compartment when this is 20 cm above the engine compart- bonnet in its movement. still hot, be careful not to burn ment. Let it fall: the bonnet will lock yourself and keep away from the automatically. electric fan as this may cut in at any time, even if the key is re- 2) Make sure that the bonnet is com- moved from the ignition switch. pletely closed and that it is not only Wait until the engine has cooled. caught in the safety retainer. If this is so, do not press the bonnet to attempt to close it. Lift the bonnet and repeat Scarves, ties and other the procedure described above.

P4T0097 loose articles of clothing could easily get caught up in moving parts.

Always make sure the fig. 167 For safety reasons the bonnet is closed properly bonnet shall always be by trying to lift it so it will perfectly closed when trav- not open whilst the car is moving.

P4T0645 elling. Always check for proper bonnet locking. If the bonnet is left inadvertently open, stop the car immediately and close the bonnet.

fig. 168 142 FUEL FILLER CAP When centrally unlocked, the flap The cap is equipped with a device will be in line with the body. To open A (fig. 172) which fastens it to the The fuel filler cap flap is controlled the flap, press the front part in point flap so that it cannot be misplaced. B (fig. 171) where there is a slight automatically by the central door While you are filling up, fasten the ridge on the surface. locking system. cap to the device inside the flap as In an emergency, the flap can be re- Then pull the back of the flap back- shown in the figure. leased by pulling wire A (fig. 169) on wards and turn it outwards at the the right-hand side of the boot (saloon same time as shown by the arrow un- versions). til the flap is fully open. In Station Wagon versions, wire A (fig. 170) can be found inside the P4T0317 right-hand utility compartment on the Do not put naked flames right-hand side of the boot. Pull the or lighted cigarettes near handle and remove the flap to reach the fuel filer hole as there the wire. is a danger of fire. Do not bend too close to the hole either so as not to The airtight seal of the cap may lead breathe in harmful vapours. to a slight increase of pressure in the tank. A hissing sound when the cap is removed is therefore quite normal. fig. 170 P4T0279 P4T0100 P4T0646

fig. 169 fig. 171 fig. 172 143 CELLULAR PHONE SET-UP (where fitted) RADIO TRANSMITTERS AND CELLULAR TELEPHONES Cellular telephones and other radio The system set-up consists of: IMPORTANT When installing the transceiver equipment (e.g.: HAM ra- cellular telephone, set the input vol- dio systems) shall not be used inside – aerial, located on car roof; ume as shown in the Sound system the car unless a separate aerial is chapter, Possible expert settings list mounted on the roof. (PHONE SETTING and PHONE The maximum power ap- IMPORTANT The use of cellular AMPLIFICATION). plicable to the aerial is telephones, HAM radio systems or 20W. other similar devices inside the pas- senger compartment (without sepa- rated aerial) produces radio-fre- quency electromagnetic fields which, – shielded wire connecting aerial and Have the cellular tele- amplified by the resonance effects in- power. The connectors are located in phone and the connections side the passenger compartment, may the central unit near the handbrake to the system installed by a cause electrical systems equipping the lever. The wire contains the sound Lancia Dealership only. This will car to malfunction. This could com- system connections for the TEL-IN ensure the best results and prevent promise safety in addition to consti- (for listening to a telephone call with problems will could effect car tuting a potential hazard for the pas- the sound system speakers) and TEL- safety. sengers. MUTE (sound system muting when a In addition, transmission and recep- call is received) functions. tion of these devices may be affected by the shielding effect of the car’s body. The hands-free telephone you purchase will need to be compatible with your cellular telephone.

144 ROOF RACK AND The four anchorage roof rack brack- Never exceed the permit- ets are located on the roof duct (two ted weight (refer to the SKI RACK per side). “Technical specifications” chapter). The brackets are under the duct ANCHORAGE POINTS weather-stripping. Lift the lip of the (fig. 173-174) rubber weather-stripping to reach the brackets. See the specific chapter for instruc- HEADLIGHTS tions for the Station Wagon version. Fasten the roof/ski rack to the brackets. GAS-DISCHARGE HEADLIGHTS IMPORTANT The weather-strip- (where fitted) ping should not be crumpled up at the Gas-discharge headlights (Xeno) bottom of the channel but should rest work with electric arc in an environ- along the sides of the roof/ski rack ment saturated with pressurised uprights. xenon gas, instead of incandescent fil- ament. After travelling a few kilometres, check that the Obtained lighting is significantly screws securing the rack higher than that of traditional lamps are tight. for both light quality (brighter light) and illuminated area extent and posi- tion.

P4T0102 P4T0103 Benefits offered by improved light- ing are noticed (less tired eyes, im- proved driver’s sense of direction and therefore improved safety) specially with bad weather conditions, fog and/or insufficient signage since side zones that generally remain in the dark are better illuminated. fig. 173 fig. 174 145 Improved side zone lighting im- Risk of malfunctioning is improbable SLANT COMPENSATION proves significantly driving safety since Xeno lamps have a very long life. (excluding versions with gas- since. IMPORTANT The bulbs of (Xeno) discharge headlights) It enables the driver to better iden- gas-discharge headlights must be re- A loaded car slopes backwards. This tify the presence of other users on the placed by a Lancia Dealership. means that the headlight beam rises. roadside (pedestrians, cyclists, mo- In this case, a compensation is re- ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT torcyclists). quired. BEAM (excluding versions with Electric arc striking requires high gas-discharge headlights) voltage, but powering needs then a Adjust the headlight lower voltage. The correct positioning of the head- beam position of the every These headlights reach their max. light beams is very important for the time you change the load brilliancy after approx. 0.5 seconds comfort and safety, not only of the to be carried. from activation. person driving the car but also all other road users. High brilliancy produced by this Use the electrical adjusting device A type of headlights requires the adop- This is also covered by a specific (fig. 175): tion of an automatic system to keep law. Position 0 - one or two people on constant the beam adjustment in or- To ensure you and other drivers front seats. der to prevent glaring the other dri- have the best visibility conditions vers in case of braking, acceleration when travelling with the headlights or load transport. on, the headlights must be set prop- The electromechanical system erly. adopted to keep constant the beam Have the headlight position checked P4T0647 adjustment makes the slant compen- - and adjusted, if required - at a Lan- sation device unnecessary. cia Dealership.

fig. 175 146 Position 1 - five people. ADJUSTING THE FRONT FOG EOBD SYSTEM Position 2 - five people + maximum LIGHT BEAM allowed load in boot. Turn screw A (fig. 176) from under The EOBD (European On Board the car to adjust the fog light beam. Diagnosis) system fitted in this car Position 3 - driver + maximum al- complies with Directive 98/69/CE lowed load in boot. Have the light position checked - (EURO 3). If your car fits an automatic rear and adjusted, if required - at a Lan- cia Dealership. This system continuously monitors trim control system, operate the elec- the engine emission system compo- trical control A (fig. 175) as follows: nents. Furthermore, the system warns Position 1 - one occupant + load in the driver of deterioration concerning the boot (to maximum allowed load). the emission system components by means of the U warning light on the Positions 2 and 3 - do not use. instrument panel. Position 0 - other conditions. The objective is to: The electronic headlight adjuster is – monitor system efficiency; not present on versions with gas dis- charge headlights as in this case head- – warn when failures can increase light adjustment employs a device emissions over the threshold estab- which is operated automatically. lished by the European regulations; – warn of the need to replace deteri- orated components. P4T0105 Furthermore, the system is equipped with a connector for interfacing with specific tools used to read the error codes stored in the control unit mem- ory along with a set of diagnostic and engine specific parameters.

fig. 176 147 Contact a Lancia Dealer- ABS OPERATION ship as soon as possible if The electronic control unit receives the U warning light either and processes the signals from the does not come on when the key is GENERAL brake pedal and the four sensors on turned to MAR or comes on, with the wheels. It consequently controls fixed or flashing light, when trav- The ABS (wheel anti-locking) sys- the hydraulic system so to decrease, elling. tem prevents wheel locking and con- sequent slipping in all road surface hold or increase the pressure in the conditions. This ensures greater con- circuit and prevent locking. trol, as it is possible to steering and brake at the same time, and reduces IMPORTANT A slight pulsation of braking space. the brake pedal may be felt when the ABS system comes into play. If the road surface conditions de- crease the friction coefficient (i.e. due IMPORTANT After eliminating the to the presence of water, ice, snow, problem, your Lancia Dealership etc.), a wheel may slip. Furthermore, will run a bench test to fully check the a wheel which is not locked can ab- system. In some cases, a long road test sorb the lateral forces exerted by the may be required. The car is fitted with an tyre which preventing steering. electronic braking device > x The car is equipped with an elec- (EBD). The and tronic brake force distributor - called warning lights come on at the EBD - which, by means of the ABS same time when the engine is run- electronic control unit and sensors, in- ning to indicate that there is an creases the brake system perfor- EBD system failure. In this case vi- mance. olent braking may be accompa- nied by early rear wheel locking with the possibility of skidding. Drive the car extremely carefully to the nearest Lancia Dealership to have the system checked.

148 The > warning light The system performance ESP SYSTEM in terms of active safety when the engine is running (where required) normally indicates a fault must not lead the driver to ASR -HILL HOLDER - in the ABS system only. In this take unnecessary or unjustified case, the braking system will still risks. Always suit your driving HYDRAULIC BRAKE ASSIST be effective although without the style to the weather, visibility and Electronic Stability Program anti-lock device assistance. In traffic conditions. these conditions, EBD system op- ESP is an electronic system used to eration may also be reduced. Also control vehicle stability. It contributes in this case, you should take your to bringing the vehicle back to its cor- car to the nearest Lancia Dealer- rect path by acting on the deflecting ship avoiding sudden braking to Excessive use of engine torque and braking the wheels sepa- have the system checked. braking (gears too short rately in case of loss of grip. and limited grip) may make the wheels slip. The ABS will A running vehicle is subjected to lat- have no effect on this type of skid- eral and longitudinal forces that can ding. be controlled by the driver as long as tyres ensure optimum road-holding; when the latter falls below the mini- mum level, the vehicle starts to swerve Stop the car immediately from the path the driver wants to fol- and contact a Lancia Deal- The maximum possible low. ership if the low brake deceleration always de- Especially when driving on a rough fluid warning light x comes on. pends on the available roadbed, or in presence of water, ice Fluid leakage will compromise ef- road grip. Obviously, grip will be or loose soil, any variation in speed ficiency of both the traditional considerably decreased in the (when accelerating or braking) and/or brake system and the ABS wheel presence of snow and ice. In these path (when taking a bend or avoiding anti-locking system. conditions, the braking space will sudden obstacles) can cause loss of still is high, even with the ABS. tyre grip.

149 When the sensors detect any condi- ESP SYSTEM OPERATION The control unit processes the infor- tion that may cause the vehicle to mation received from the sensors and, The ESP system is automatically ac- skid, the ESP system acts both on the therefore, is able to continuously tuated upon starting the vehicle and engine and the brakes, by generating monitor the vehicle’s position and cannot be switched off. a stabilizing torque. compare the latter with the path that The main components of the ESP the driver intends to follow. In case of system are: disagreement, the control unit selects – an electronic control unit that and performs, in a fraction of a sec- The system’s active safety processes the signals received from the ond, the most adequate actions to features must not induce various sensors and performs the most bring the vehicle back to its path: it the driver to take any un- adequate actions; apply the brakes to one or several necessary risk. Driving behaviour wheels with different force and, if must always be proportionate to – a sensor that detects the steering wheel position; necessary, reduces the power gener- the roadbed conditions, as well as ated by the engine. to visibility and traffic. In any case, – four sensors that detect the re- the responsibility for road safety volving speed of each wheel; Corrective actions are continuously always rests with the driver. – a sensor that detects the vehicle ro- modified and controlled to pursue the tation around the vertical axis, and an path wanted by the driver. integrated sensor that detects lateral The action of the ESP system greatly acceleration (centrifugal force). increases the vehicle’s active safety in The stabilizing action of the ESP many critical situations and is useful An ESP system that also incorpo- system is based on the calculations especially when the roadbed adhesion rates the ASR function helps the dri- made by the system’s electronic con- conditions are uneven. ver keep control of the vehicle in case trol unit, which processes the signals of loss of grip between the tyre and received from the sensors used to de- the roadbed. tect steering wheel rotation, lateral ac- The forces generated by the ESP celeration and the revolving speed of control system to control the vehicle’s each wheel. These signals allow the loss of stability always depend on the control unit to recognize the manoeu- grip between the tyres and the vre the driver is going to perform roadbed. when turning the steering wheel.

150 ASR FUNCTION ESP SYSTEM ACTUATION ASR FUNCTION Antislip Regulation SIGNAL SWITCHING ON (fig. 177) Through the ASR function, the ESP Actuation of the ESP system is sig- The ESP system actuates the ASR system controls the vehicle’s traction: nalled by the flashing of warning function every time the engine is it is automatically actuated every time lamp á on the dashboard: this in- started. When the vehicle is running, one or both driving wheels skid. forms the driver of the vehicle’s criti- the ASR function can be switched off cal stability and grip conditions. and then on again by pressing switch The ESP systems detects the skid of A on the central console. one or both driving wheels and re- duces the power generated from the ESP system fault warning ASR function switching off is sig- engine, making it proportionate to the In case of faults, the ESP system is nalled by the lighting up of LED B on roadbed adhesion. automatically switched off: this causes the switch. á Two different control systems are warning lamp on the dashboard to If this function is switched off when actuated, according to the skidding light up and stay on. the vehicle is running, it will be auto- conditions: In case of ESP system faults, the ve- matically switched on again the next time the engine is started. – if the skid of both driving wheels hicle’s behaviour will be the same as is caused by the excess power gener- the models not equipped with this sys- ated, the ESP system comes into ac- tem: in any case, it is recommended tion by reducing the engine power; that you contact your Lancia Deal- ership. – if skidding affects only one driving wheel, the ESP system comes into ac- It is recommended that tion by automatically braking the P4T0741 the ASR function be skidding wheel, thus producing an ef- switched off when snow fect very similar to the one produced chains are fitted to the wheels. by a self-locking differential.

fig. 177 151 ASR FUNCTION HH FUNCTION After 2 seconds and without starting ACTUATION SIGNAL Hill Holder (where provided) the car, the system automatically de- activates gradually releasing the brak- ASR function actuation is signalled It is an integral part of the ESP sys- ing pressure. During this phase it is by the flashing of warning lamp á on tem and facilitates starting on an up- possible to hear the typical brake me- the dashboard: this informs the driver hill slope. chanical disengaging noise which in- that the system is adapting itself to It is automatically activated in the dicates the car is about to move off. the roadbed adhesion conditions. following conditions: ASR function fault warning Uphill: vehicle stationary on a road with gradient above 2%, engine run- In case of faults, this function is au- ning, clutch and brake pedals pressed tomatically switched off. This condi- and gearbox in neutral position or tion is signalled by the simultaneous gear engaged (reverse excluded). lighting up of warning lamp á on the dashboard and of LED B on the Downhill: stationary on a road with switch. gradient above 2%, engine running, clutch and brake pedals pressed and In case of faults, the vehicle’s be- reverse engaged. haviour will be the same as the mod- els not equipped with this function: in During pickup the ESP system con- any case, it is recommended that you trol unit maintains the wheel braking contact your Lancia Dealership as pressure until the engine torque re- soon as possible, to have the ESP sys- quired for start up is reached, or any- tem checked. way for a maximum of 2 seconds, so that the right foot can be moved eas- ily from the brake pedal to the accel- erator pedal.

152 Failure warnings For correct operation of HBA FUNCTION the ESP system, the tyres In the event of failure, the instru- Hydraulic Brake Assist must absolutely be of the ment cluster warning light * will (where provided) HBA same brand and type on all come on together with the message on wheels, in perfect conditions and, The function, which cannot be cut the reconfigurable multifunction dis- above all, of the type, brand and out, recognizes emergency braking play (see section “Warning lights and size specified. (on the ground of the brake pedal op- messages”). eration speed) and considerably in- creases the pressure in the braking circuit. Hydraulic Brake Assist is deacti- The Hill Holder system is vated on the versions equipped with not a parking brake there- ESP, in the event of ESP system fail- fore, never leave the car ure (indicated by warning á ). without engaging the parking brake, the first gear and turning the engine off.

During the use of the spare wheel, the ESP func- tion carries on working. However, you must remind that the spare wheel presents dimen- sions smaller than the standard tyre and therefore the grip is re- duced as to the other car tyres.

153 SOUND SYSTEM SPEAKERS Speakers on the rear window shelf (fig. 180) Front speakers (fig. 178) DEVICES Speakers D are located at the ends The car is equipped with a complete The front speakers are housed in the of the rear window shelf. sound system. front door panels. The sound system is built into the A - Tweeter (excluding versions with multiple function display and can be BOSE HI-FI system) equipped with an optional CD player and HI-FI sound system. B - Woofer.

Lancia ICS (Integrated Control Rear speakers (fig. 179) System) with navigation system The rear speakers C are housed in (where fitted) the rear door panels (versions with BOSE HI-FI system only). The Lancia ICS system with naviga- tion system and instructions for oper- ating the specific sound system are provided in the supplement attached to this Owner Handbook for cars where this system is fitted. P4T0106 P4T0107 P4T0738

fig. 178 fig. 179 fig. 180 154 CD PLAYER (where fitted) BOSE HI-FI SOUND SYSTEM The HI-FI sound system was specif- (fig. 181) (where fitted) ically designed for the Lybra to offer the best acoustic performance and the The CD player is housed in the spe- The HI-FI sound system consists of: musical realism of a live concert in cific compartment on the left-hand – two high-performance woofers each seat in the passenger compart- side of the boot over the Lancia I.C.S. (168 mm diameter) fitted in front ment. navigation system CD drive (where door panels fitted). System characteristics include crys- – two coaxial tweeters (50 mm di- talline treble and full, rich basses. Turn knob A to open the flap. ameter) built-into the front door Furthermore, the complete range of woofers tones is played in the entire passenger compartment embracing the passen- – two high-performance, wide-band gers with the feeling of space typical mid-range speakers (160 mm diame- of live music. ter) fitted in the rear door panels The system components are – one high-performance subwoofer patented and result from state-of-the- (230 mm diameter) fitted on the rear art technology. At the same time, the window shelf (saloon versions) system is easy and intuitive to use and – one bass box volume (14 dm3) fit- allows even the least experts to use the ted on the right-hand side of the boot system to the best. (Station Wagon versions) – a high power HI-FI amplifier with 6 channels each with 37W, two of P4T0282 which for class D subwoofer or bass box, with digital signal equalization. Overall musical power 220W.

fig. 181 155 DRIVING YOUR CAR

To help you handle your car in the best and STARTING THE ENGINE ...... 157 safest possible way, and above all use it to its PARKING ...... 160 fullest potential, we have given you some hints AT THE FILLING STATION ...... 160 in this chapter on “what to do, what not to do SAFE DRIVING ...... 164 and what to avoid” when at the wheel of your CONTAINING RUNNING COSTS AND Lybra. POLLUTION...... 168 Most of the time, these suggestions apply to CHEAP RUNNING THAT RESPECT THE ENVIRONMENT ...... 170 other cars as well. Sometimes, however, the tip may apply to an exclusive Lybra feature. You TOWING A TRAILER ...... 171 are therefore strongly recommended to pay the SNOW CHAINS ...... 172 closest attention to this section for helpful hints STORING THE CAR ...... 173 on optimum driving practices and usage of the REPEATED CHECKS AND CHECKS car that will help you get the most out of your BEFORE LONG TRIPS ...... 173 car. ACCESSORIES PURCHASED BY THE OWNER ...... 174 USEFUL ACCESSORIES ...... 174

156 STARTING THE ENGINE If the engine does not start at the first attempt, return the ignition key to STOP before trying to start the en- gine again. It is dangerous to let the HOW TO START PETROL engine run in a garage of VERSIONS If the warning light ¢ stays on with other closed area. The en- warning light U when the ignition gine consumes oxygen and gives 1) Ensure that the handbrake is up. key is at MAR, turn the key to STOP off carbon dioxide, carbon monox- 2) Put the gear lever into neutral. and then to MAR; if the warning light ide and other poisonous gases. stays on, try with the other keys pro- 3) Press the clutch pedal down to vided. the floor without touching the accel- erator. If you are still unable to start the en- gine, perform the emergency start-up 4) Turn the ignition key to AVV and procedure (see “In an emergency”) The engine may be more noisier release it as soon as the engine starts. and call your Lancia Dealership. than usual during the first seconds of operation, especially after it has not IMPORTANT Never leave the igni- been used for a while. This charac- tion key at MAR when the engine is teristic feature of the hydraulic tappet off. system does not compromise func- tionality or reliability. The system de- Never touch the high volt- vised for the Lybra was designed to age cables (spark plug ca- limit maintenance interventions. bles) when the engine is running.

157 HOW TO START JTD VERSIONS The warning light m If the engine does not start at the will flash (for approxi- first attempt, return the ignition key 1) Ensure that the handbrake is up. mately 60 seconds) at start- to STOP before trying to start the en- 2) Put the gear lever into neutral. up or during prolonged cranking gine again. to signal a fault in the glow plug 3) Turn the ignition key to MAR. In- If the warning light ¢ stays on with heating system. You can use the strument panel warning lights m warning light U when the ignition car as usual if the engine starts but and ¢ will come on. key is at MAR, turn the key to STOP you should contact a Lancia Deal- and then to MAR; if the warning light 4 ership as soon as possible to have ) Wait for the instrument panel stays on, try with the other keys pro- ¢ problem seen to. warning light to go out. vided. 5) Wait for the instrument panel m If you still cannot start the engine, warning light to go out. The hot- get in touch with a Lancia Dealer- ter the engine is, the quicker this will ship. happen. 6) Press the clutch pedal down to IMPORTANT Never leave the igni- the floor. tion key at MAR when the engine is off. 7) Turn the key to AVV immedi- ately after the m warning light goes out. If you wait to long, you will lose the benefit of the work done by the glow plugs. Idling ratio is kept automatically higher than usual when the engine is cold.

158 HOW TO WARM UP THE BUMP STARTING STOPPING THE ENGINE ENGINE AFTER IS HAS JUST Turn the ignition key to STOP while STARTED the engine is idling. (petrol and jtd versions) Never bump start the en- – Begin to move forward slowly let- gine (by pushing, towing or coasting downhill) as this ting the engine turn at medium revs. A quick burst on the ac- Do not accelerate abruptly. could cause fuel to flow into the catalytic exhaust system and dam- celerator before turning – Do not push the engine to its limit age it beyond repair. off the engine serves ab- for the first few kilometres. You are solutely no practical purpose and recommended to wait until the coolant wastes fuel. temperature has reached 50° to 60°C.

EMERGENCY START-UP If the Lancia CODE system fails to recognise that code transmitted by the IMPORTANT After a taxing drive ignition key (instrument panel warn- you should allow the engine to “catch ¢ U Remember that until the ing light or on) the emergency engine has started the its breath” before turning it off by let- start– up can be performed by using brake booster and power ting it idle to allow the temperature in the CODE card code. steering systems will not work and the engine compartment to fall. See “In an emergency”. a greater effort will therefore be required to press the brake pedal or turn the steering wheel.

159 PARKING AT THE FILLING STATION

Stop the engine, engage the hand- brake and engage a gear (first gear if PETROL VERSIONS Never put even the tiniest the car is faced uphill or reverse if it amount of leaded petrol in The car’s pollution control devices is faced downhill). Leave the wheels the fuel tank of your car make it essential to use unleaded steered so to stop the car immediately even in an emergency. You would petrol only. if the handbrake is accidentally re- damage the catalytic converter be- leased. However, to avoid errors, the diam- yond repair. Block the wheels with a wedge or a eter of the fuel filler is too small to in- stone if the car is parked on a steep troduce a lead petrol pump filler. slope. Use petrol with a rated octane num- An inefficient catalytic Do not leave the ignition key at ber (R.O.N.) not lower than 95. converter will allow harm- MAR to prevent draining the battery. ful exhaust fumes to be Tank capacity: 60 litres including a emitted and thus contribute to air Always remove the key when you reserve of approximately 8 litres. pollution. leave the car. P4T0246

Never leave unsupervised children in the car.

fig. 1 160 JTD VERSIONS In spring or autumn, however, when ENGINE OIL the maximum and minimum tem- Checking the level: see the “Car perature range is wide (from 0 to Refuel with diesel fuel for maintenance” chapter. + 15°C), the quality of diesel fuel sold motor vehicles complying at fuelling stations may not be ade- The gap between the MIN and MAX with European Specifica- quate. reference lines on the dipstick corre- tions EN590 only. The use of other sponds to approximately one litre of products or mixtures can damage In this case, especially for frequent oil. the engine beyond repair and con- engine stopping and starting at low sequent forfeit the warranty for the temperatures (e.g. in the mountains), Use SAE 10W-40 or SAE 5W-30 oil damage caused. If you accidentally refuel with winter type diesel fuel. Al- for petrol engines. use other types of fuel, do not start ternatively add a specific diesel fuel Use SAE 10W-40 or SAE 5W-40 oil the engine and empty the tank. If, additive to the fuel, in the proportions for diesel engines. on the other hand, the engine has written on the container. Pour the ad- run, even for a very short time, you ditive into the fuel tank before the For other information, see the will need to drain the fuel lines as fuel. “Technical specifications” chapter. well as emptying the tank. The additive is effective only if it is added before the cold begins to take ENGINE COOLANT Diesel fuel fluidity decreases at low effect on the fuel. Adding the product Top up with a 50– 50 mixture of temperatures due to the paraffin it after will not have any effect. distilled water and PARAFLU UP. contains and can clog up the fuel fil- For other information, see the “Tech- ter. nical specifications” chapter. To avoid possible problems, fuelling stations usually sell summer or win- ter fuel according to the period of the year.

161 SPARK PLUGS BULBS TYPE POWER

LANCIA RC10YCC Main beam headlights H7 55W Dipped beam headlights H7 55W LANCIA BKR5EZ 1.6 Gas-discharge main beam and D2R 35W Champion RC10YCC dipped beam headlights Front sidelights H6W 6W NGK BKR5EZ Front direction indicators PY21W 21W LANCIA RC10YCC Side direction indicators PY5W 5W LANCIA BKR6EZ Rear direction indicators PY21W 21W 1.8 Front fog lights H1 55W Champion RC10YCC Taillights R10W 10W NGK BKR6EZ Brake lights P21W 21W 2.0 LANCIA RC8BYC Third brake light (saloon) 2.3W 2.3W Champion RC8BYC Third brake light (SW) H21W 21W Reversing light P21W 21W Rear fog light P21W 21W Number plate light C5W 5W Front ceiling light W5W 5W Courtesy lights C10W 10W Rear side C10W 10W Glove compartment (where fitted) C5W 5W Boot (saloon) C5W 5W Boot (SW) C10W 10W Doors W5W 5W

162 TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar) Saloon Tyre Average load Full load Space-saver Front Rear Front Rear spare wheel 1.6 195/65 R15 91H 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 4.2 205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 4.2 1.8 195/65 R15 91V 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 4.2 205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 4.2 2.0 195/65 R15 91V 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 4.2 205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 4.2 205/55 R16 91V (■) 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.5 4.2 1.9 jtd 195/65 R15 91H 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 4.2 205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 4.2 2.4 jtd 195/65 R15 91V 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 4.2 205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 4.2 205/55 R16 91V (■) 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.5 4.2

Station Wagon 1.6 195/65 R15 91H 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2 205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2 1.8 195/65 R15 91V 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2 205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2 2.0 195/65 R15 91V 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2 205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2 205/55 R16 91V (■) 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.5 (2.8*) 4.2 1.9 jtd 195/65 R15 91H 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2 205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2 2.4 jtd 195/65 R15 91V 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2 205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2 205/55 R16 91V (■) 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.5 (2.8*) 4.2 (■) Optional (*) Maximum load in boot with seats folded + 1 person + 350 kg. 0.3 bar should be added to the values given if the pressure is measured while the tyre is hot.

163 SAFE DRIVING – Make sure that nothing (mats, – Periodically, remember to check etc.) gets in the way of the pedals the fluid levels as shown in the para- In designing the Lybra, LANCIA has when they are pushed down. graph “Repeated checks and checks before long trips” in this chapter. made every effort to come up with a – Adjust the seat belts to match your car able to provide driver and pas- height (see “Getting to know your car sengers with top-class levels of safety. – Seat belts”). WHEN TRAVELLING Nevertheless it is always the behav- – Make sure that any child restraint – The first rule of safe driving is pru- iour of the person at the wheel that dence. determines road safety. systems (child seats, carriers etc.) are properly fixed on the rear seat. – Prudence also means putting your- Below you will find some simple tips self into a position where you can pre- to help you travel in safety under dif- – Place any objects in the boot in such a way that they cannot be dict wrong or imprudent behaviour ferent conditions. You will no doubt from other drivers. be familiar with many of them al- thrown forwards in the event of an ac- ready but it will be useful to read cident. – Stick closely to the rules of the them all carefully. – Avoid placing light coloured ob- road in the particular country where jects or sheets of paper on the dash- the vehicle is being driven and, above BEFORE GETTING BEHIND THE board to prevent reflections on the all, do not exceed speed limits. WHEEL windscreen. – Ensure that, besides yourself, all the other passengers in the car have – Make sure all lights, including the – Light eating will help keep your their seat belts fastened, that children headlights, are working properly. reflexes prompt. Above all, do not have anything alcoholic to drink. Cer- are sitting in the appropriate child – Adjust the position of the seats, tain prescription drugs can impair seats and any animals in the car are steering wheel, driving and door mir- your driving skills: read the attached placed in suitable compartments. rors properly for the best driving po- literature carefully. sition. – Carefully adjust head restraints so the back of the head and not the nape of the neck is supported.

164 Driving while drunk or – Make sure the air in the car is be- – Make sure the headlight beams are under the influence of ing changed continuously. properly positioned: if they are too drugs or certain medicines low, they reduce visibility and strain – Never coast downhill (i.e. with the is dangerous for both you and your eyes. If they are too high they engine off): if you do, you lose the aid other road users. can dazzle other drivers. of engine braking and power brakes so that braking requires greater effort. – Only use main beam headlights when you are driving outside town – Never coast downhill (i.e. with the and when you are sure they do not engine off): if you do, you lose the aid annoy other drivers. Always fasten both front of engine braking. and back seat belts, in- – Dip your headlights as soon as you cluding child restraint sys- DRIVING AT NIGHT see cars coming in the other direction tems. Travelling with the seat belts and pass them with the headlights unfastened increases the risk of in- There are the main rules to follow dipped. jury or death if you are in a colli- when you are driving at night. – Keep all lights clean. sion. – Drive especially carefully: it is harder to drive at night. – Beware of animals crossing the road when driving in the country. – Slow down especially if the road is not lit. – At the first signs of sleepiness, stop: continuing would be a risk for your- – You should be physically fit and self and everybody else. Only start mentally alert before setting out on driving again when you have had long journeys. enough rest. – Do not drive too many hours at a – Keep a greater safety distance time but stop at intervals to stretch from the cars in front of you than your legs and recoup your energy. during daylight hours: it is hard to judge how fast other cars are going when all you can see are their lights.

165 DRIVING IN THE RAIN – Move the ventilation controls to IMPORTANT On stretches of road the position for demisting the win- with good visibility, switch off your Rain and wet road surfaces spell dows (see “Getting to know your rear fog lights; the brightness of these danger. car”) so to avoid visibility problems. lights could annoy the people travel- All manoeuvres are more difficult on ling in the cars behind. – Periodically check the condition of a wet road because the grip of the the windscreen wiper blades. – Remember that fog also means the wheels on the tarmac is greatly re- tarmac is wet and therefore manoeu- duced. This is why braking distances vres of all kinds are more difficult and are much longer and road-holding is DRIVING IN FOG stopping distances are longer. lower. – If the fog is thick, do not start out – Keep a good distance from the cars Here is some advice for driving in on a journey unless you absolutely in front of you. the rain: have to. – As far as possible, avoid spurts of – Reduce speed and maintain a – If driving in mist, blanket fog or speed or sudden deceleration. greater safety distance from the cars when there is the danger of fog in front. patches: – Do not overtake other vehicles if you can help it. – If it is raining particularly heavily, – Keep your speed down. visibility is also reduced. In these – Turn on the dipped headlights, – If you are forced to stop your car cases, switch on the dipped headlights rear fog lights and front fog lights, if (breakdown, limited visibility etc.) try even if it is still daylight so you can be fitted, even during the day. Do not to stop off the road. Turn on the haz- seen more easily. drive with your headlights at main ard lights and, if possible, the dipped beam headlights. Rhythmically sound – Do not drive through puddles at beam. the horn if you realise another car is speed and hold on tightly to the wheel coming. if you do: a puddle taken at high speed might cause you to lose control of the car (“aquaplaning”).

166 DRIVING IN THE MOUNTAINS – Prevalently use the engine brake 2) It makes it possible to brake and and avoid sudden braking. steer at the same time so you can – When driving downhill use the en- avoid unexpected obstacles and direct gine braking effect by engaging a low – When braking in a car not fitted the car where you want while brak- gear so as not to overheat the brakes. with ABS, reduce the possibility of the ing. wheels locking by varying the pres- – Under no circumstances should sure you exert on the brake pedal. To get the most out of ABS: you drive downhill with the engine off or with the gear in neutral, let alone – Do not accelerate suddenly and – During emergency stops or when with the ignition key out. avoid swerving. grip conditions are poor, you will feel a slight pulsation on the brake pedal. – Drive at a moderate speed without – In the winter, even apparently dry This is the sign that the ABS is work- cutting corners. roads may have icy patches. Be care- ing. Do not release the brake pedal ful therefore when driving over – Remember that overtaking while but continue to press so as not to in- stretches that do not get much expo- going uphill is slower and therefore terrupt the braking action. sure to the sun or are lined with trees requires more free road. If you are be- or rocks where ice might not have – The ABS prevents the wheels from ing overtaken while driving uphill, melted. locking, but it does not increase ac- make it easier for the other vehicle to tual grip conditions between tyre and pass. – Keep a good distance from the ve- road. Therefore, even if your car is fit- hicles in front. ted with ABS, keep a safe distance DRIVING ON SNOW AND ICE from the car in front of you and keep DRIVING WITH ABS Here are some tips for driving in your speed down when driving into these conditions: The ABS is a braking system that es- bends. sentially offers two advantages: – Keep your speed down. – ABS serves to increase your con- 1) It prevents wheel lock and conse- trol over the car, not to enable you to – Use chains if the roads are covered quent skidding in emergency stops, go faster. in snow, see “Snow chains” in this particularly when the road does not chapter. offer much grip.

167 CONTAINING RUNNING COSTS Roof rack/ski rack Remove the roof or ski racks from AND POLLUTION the car as soon as they are no longer needed. These accessories reduce the aero- Some suggestions which may help Tyres dynamic penetration of the car and you to keep the running costs of the Tyre pressure should be checked at will increase consumption. When car down and lower the amount of least once every four weeks: if the transporting particularly large objects, toxic emissions released into the at- pressure is too low fuel consumption use a trailer, where possible. mosphere are given below. increases as the resistance to the rolling movement of the tyre is Electrical devices GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS greater. In this state, tyre wear is in- Use electrical devices for the neces- creased and handling suffers which sary time only. The heated rear win- Car maintenance will effect safety. dow, fog lights, windscreen wipers, The overall state of the car is an im- heater fan require large amounts of portant factor which has a marked in- Unnecessary loads electricity and increasing the request fluence over fuel consumption and Do not travel with too much load in for power will also increase fuel con- driving comfort and on the life span the boot. The weight of the car and its sumption (up to +25% when driving of your car. For this reason care trim greatly effects consumption and in towns). should be taken to maintain your car stability. by carrying out the necessary checks Climate control system and regulations in accordance with the specifications given in the service The climate control system is an ad- schedule (see sections: spark plugs, ditional load which greatly effects the idling, air cleaners, timing). engine leading to higher consumption (up to +20% in average). When the temperature outside allows, use the air vents where possible.

168 Spoilers Gear selections Acceleration The use of optional extras which are As soon as the traffic and road con- Accelerating violently increasing the not certified for specific use on the car ditions allow it, shift to a higher gear. revs will greatly effect consumption may reduce the aerodynamic pene- Using a lower gear to liven up accel- and emission: acceleration should be tration of the car and increase con- eration greatly increases consumption. gradual and not exceed the maximum sumption. In the same way, improper use of the torque. higher gears will increase consump- DRIVING STYLE tion, emissions and wear and tear on CONDITIONS OF USE the engine. Starting Cold starting Do not warm the engine when the Top speeds Frequent cold starting will not en- car is stationary or at high or low revs: Fuel consumption increases consid- able the engine to reach optimal run- in this way the engine will warm up erably as speed increases. For exam- ning temperature. It follows, there- gradually increasing consumption and ple, when accelerating from 90 to 120 fore, that consumption will be higher emissions. You should drive off slowly km/h, fuel consumption increases up (from +15 to +30% in towns) as will straight away avoiding high revs so to approximately +30%. Your speed the production of toxic emissions. that the engine will warm up more should be kept as even as possible and quickly. superfluous braking and acceleration avoided as this increases both con- Unnecessary actions sumption and emissions. A “smooth” Avoid revving the engine when driving style should be adopted by at- stopped at traffic lights or before tempting to anticipate manoeuvres to switching off the engine and avoid avoid imminent danger and to keep a doubling the clutch as these actions safe distance from the vehicle in front have no purpose of modern vehicles to avoid braking sharply. and serve only to increase consump- tion and pollution.

169 Traffic and road conditions CHEAP RUNNING THAT RESPECTS Heavy traffic and higher consump- tion are synonymous: for example, THE ENVIRONMENT when driving slowly with frequent use of lower gears or in towns where there Environmental protection has been LOOKING AFTER EMISSION are numerous traffic lights. one of the guiding principles in the CONTROL DEVICES production of the Lybra. It is no acci- Winding roads, mountain roads and dent that its pollution control equip- The correct use of pollution control bumpy roads also have a negative ef- ment is much more effective than that devices not only ensures respect for fect on consumption. required by current legislation. the environment but also has an effect on the car’s performance. Keeping Enforced halts Nonetheless, the environment can- these devices in good condition is not get by without a concerted effort therefore a fundamental rule for dri- During prolonged stops (traffic from everyone. ving that is easy on your pocket and lights, level crossings, etc.) the engine on the environment too. should be switched off. By following a few simple rules you can avoid harming the environment The first step to take is to follow the and often cut down fuel consumption Service Schedule to the letter. at the same time. Only use unleaded petrol for petrol On this subject, a few useful tips engines. have been given below to supplement those marked by symbol # at various If you have trouble starting, do not points of the handbook. You are asked keep turning the ignition key for long to read both the former and latter periods. Be especially careful to avoid carefully. bump starting the car by pushing, towing or rolling downhill: these are all manoeuvres that can damage the catalytic exhaust. Use an auxiliary battery for start-ups only.

170 If the engine begins to “loose its When functioning nor- TOWING A smoothness” when travelling, con- mally the catalytic con- tinue your journey but reduce the de- verter reaches high tem- TRAILER mands you are making on the engine peratures. For this reason do not and have the car seen to at a Lancia park the car over inflammable Dealership soon as you can. material (grass, dry leaves, pine IMPORTANT needles etc.): fire hazard. When the instrument panel fuel re- The car must be fitted with a ho- serve warning light comes on, fill up mologated tow hitch and suitable as soon as possible. A low level of fuel electrical system for towing a caravan can cause an uneven supply of fuel to or trailer. the engine with the inevitable increase Fit special rearview mirrors in ac- in the temperature of the exhaust gas Do not install other heat shields and cordance with the highway code. and serious damage to the catalytic do not remove those already fitted to converter. the catalytic converter and exhaust Remember that towing a trailer pipe. makes it harder for the car to climb Never run the engine with the spark the maximum gradients specified. plugs disconnected even for testing Do not allow anything to be sprayed purposes. onto the catalytic converter, lambda Engage a low gear when driving sensor and exhaust pipe. downhill rather than constantly brak- Do not warm up the engine by let- ing. ting it idle for a while before moving off unless the outside temperature is The weight the trailer exerts on the very low and, even in this case, only car’s tow hitch coupling reduces the do so for less than thirty seconds. car’s loading capacity by the same Ignoring the above rules amount. may lead to fire.

171 In order to be sure you are not ex- SNOW CHAINS Snow chains cannot be ceeding the maximum towing weight fitted to the compact spare you have to take into account the The use of snow chains is regulated wheel. So, if a front (drive) trailer’s fully laden weight, including by the legislation in force in the coun- wheel is punctured and chains are accessories and personal luggage. try the car is driven in. needed, a rear wheel should be fit- ted to the front of the vehicle (in- Do not exceed the speed limits for Use only low profile chains with flate the tyres to the specified pres- towing a trailer in the country you are maximum height off the tyre of sure as soon as possible) and the driving in. 9 mm. spare wheel should be fitted to the rear. This way, with two normal The chains may only be applied to drive wheels, snow chains can be the drive wheel tyres (front wheels). fitted to them to solve an emer- Before purchasing or using snow gency. The ABS system will not chains, you should contact a Lancia control the trailer braking Dealership for advice. system. Great care should therefore be taken when driving on Check the tautness of the chains af- slippery road surfaces. ter driving some ten metres.

Keep you speed Under no circumstances down when snow modify the car’s braking chains are fitted. system for trailer braking Do not exceed 50 km/h. Avoid pot- control. The trailer’s braking sys- holes, steps and pavements to pre- tem must be completely indepen- vent damaging the tyres, suspen- dent of the car’s hydraulic system. sion and steering.

172 STORING THE CAR REPEATED CHECKS AND The following precautions should be – Make sure the handbrake is not CHECKS BEFORE taken if the car will not be used for engaged. several months: LONG TRIPS – Clean and protect the painted – Park the car in covered, dry and if parts using protective wax. Periodically, remember to check: possible well-ventilated premises. – Clean and protect the shiny metal – tyre pressure and condition – Engage a gear. parts using special compounds read- ily available. – level of battery electrolyte – Make sure the handbrake is not engaged. – Sprinkle talcum powder on the – engine oil level rubber windscreen and rear window – Remove the cables from the bat- – coolant level and condition of the wiper blades and lift them off the tery terminals (first remove the cable system glass. to the negative terminal), and check – brake fluid level the battery charge. If the car is to be – Slightly open the windows. stored for long periods the battery – windscreen washer liquid level – Cover the car with a cloth or per- charge should be checked every forated plastic sheet. Do not use – power steering fluid level. three months and recharged if it falls sheets of non-perforated plastic as below 12.5 V. they do not allow moisture on the body to evaporate. IMPORTANT Where relevant, switch off the electronic car alarm – Inflate the tyres to 0.5 bar above with the remote control and turn the the normal specified pressure and emergency key to off (see “Electronic check it at intervals. alarm” in the chapter “Getting to – Do not drain the engine cooling know your car”). system.

173 ACCESSORIES PURCHASED BY THE OWNER

RADIO TRANSMITTERS AND The use of cellular tele- CELLULAR TELEPHONES phones, HAM radio sys- tems or other similar de- Cellular telephones and other radio vices inside the passenger com- transceiver equipment (e.g. HAM ra- partment (without an aerial) pro- dio systems) must not be used inside duces radio-frequency electro- the car unless a separate aerial is magnetic fields which, amplified mounted on the roof. by the resonance effects inside the passenger compartment, may cause electrical systems equipping the car to malfunction. This could compromise safety in addition to constituting a potential hazard for the passengers. In addition, trans- mission and reception of these de- vices may be affected by the shielding effect of the car’s body.

174 IN AN EMERGENCY

People who find themselves in an emergency EMERGENCY START– UP ...... 176 situation need immediate and concrete help. JUMP STARTING ...... 177 BUMP STARTING ...... 178 The following pages have been written to help IF A TYRE IS PUNCTURED ...... 178 you if the need arises. IF A BULB BURNS OUT ...... 185 As you will see, a host of little snags have IF AN EXTERIOR BULB BURNS OUT ...... 188 been taken into account and, for each of them, IF AN INTERIOR BULB BURNS OUT ...... 193 the measures you yourself can take are sug- IF A FUSE BLOWS ...... 196 gested. If the problems are more serious, how- IF THE BATTERY IS FLAT ...... 205 ever, you should have the car seen to at a Lan- cia Dealership. JACKING THE CAR...... 205 TOWING THE CAR ...... 206 With regard to this, we would like to remind IF AN ACCIDENT OCCURS...... 207 you that, in addition to the Owner Handbook, you have also been provided with the Warranty Booklet where you will find details of all the services LANCIA can provide should you find yourself in difficulty. We nevertheless recommend you read these pages. If in need you will be able to find the information you require much more quickly.

175 EMERGENCY 1) Read the five digit electronic code 7) Once the final figure has been en- on the CODE card. tered, keep the accelerator pedal pressed. The U warning light will START-UP 2) Turn the ignition key to MAR. light up for four seconds and then go If the Lancia CODE system cannot 3) Press and hold down the acceler- out; release the accelerator pedal. ator pedal. The injection system deactivate the engine immobilising 8) The U warning light will flash ¢ U warning light U will come on for system, the warning lights and rapidly for about four seconds to in- about eight seconds, and then go out. stay on and the engine will not start. dicate that the operation has been At this point release the accelerator Follow the emergency start– up pro- completed correctly. cedure to start the engine. pedal and get ready to count the flashes of warning light U. 9) Start the engine by turning the ig- Read the whole procedure care- nition key from MAR to AVV. fully before trying to carry it out. 4) Count the number of flashes that corresponds to the first figure of the If, however, warning light Ustays If you make a mistake in the emer- code on the CODE card, then press on, turn the ignition key to STOP and gency procedure, you must turn the the accelerator pedal and keep it repeat the procedure from step 1). ignition key back to STOP and repeat down until the U warning light IMPORTANT After an emergency the whole operation from the begin- comes on for four seconds and then start, you should contact a Lancia ning (step 1). goes out; release the accelerator pedal. Dealership as you will have to repeat 5) The U warning light will start the procedure described each time flashing again: after it has flashed the you want to start the engine. number of times that corresponds to the second figure on the CODE card, press the accelerator pedal to the floor and keep it there. 6) Do the same for the remaining digts on the CODE card.

176 JUMP STARTING Do not carry out this pro- cedure if you lack experi- ence; if it is not done cor- rectly it can cause very intense If the battery is flat, you can use an- 3) Start the engine. electrical discharges and even bat- other battery to start the engine. Its 4) When the engine has been tery explosion. Do not put naked capacity must be the same or slightly started, remove the leads in the re- flames or lighted cigarettes near greater than the flat battery (see the verse order (i.e. D and C, B and fi- the battery and do not cause “Technical Specifications” chapter). nally A). sparks: risk of explosion and fire. Proceed as follows: If the engine fails to start after a few 1) Connect positive terminals A (fig. attempts, do not keep turning the key 1) and B of the two batteries with a but have the car seen to at a Lancia jump lead. Dealership. 2) With a second lead, connect the negative terminal C of the auxiliary battery to the earth braid D of the car to be started. Never use a battery charger to jump start the IMPORTANT Do not directly con- engine: you could damage nect the two negative terminals: the electronic system, with special sparks could ignite the flammable gas reference to the ignition and injec- from the battery. If the other battery tion control unit. is fitted in a vehicle, prevent acciden- P4T0109 tal contact between the metal parts of the two vehicles.

fig. 1 177 BUMP STARTING IF A TYRE IS The space-saver spare wheel is narrower than a PUNCTURED standard wheel and must only be used to reach a service sta- Follow the instructions on this and tion where to have the punctured the following pages to use the jack tyre repaired. Do not exceed 80 and spare wheel (or space-saver spare km/h with the spare wheel fitted. wheel, where fitted) correctly. An adhesive label is attached to the space-saver spare wheel sum- Do not bump start by marising the main precautions to pushing, towing or coast- Signal the presence of the observe when the spare wheel is ing downhill. This way of stopped car according to fitted and the respective limita- starting could cause a rush of fuel the laws in force (e.g. haz- tions. The following information is into the catalytic converter and ard lights, reflecting triangle, etc.). provided in four languages on the damage it beyond repair. Any passengers on board should adhesive label: get out, especially if the car is CAUTION! FOR TEMPORARY heavily laden. Passengers should USE ONLY! 80 KM/H MAX! stay clear from oncoming traffic REPLACE WITH A STANDARD while the wheel is being changed. WHEEL AS SOON AS POSSIBLE. If the wheel is being changed on DO NOT COVER THIS LABEL. a steep or badly surfaced road, Never apply a wheel cap on the Remember that if the en- place wedges or other suitable ma- space-saver spare wheel. The han- gine is not running, the terial under the wheels to stop the dling of your car will change when power brakes will not car from moving. the spare wheel is fitted. Avoid ac- work. You therefore have to use celerating or braking suddenly, considerably more effort on the The space-saver spare steering abruptly or fast cornering. brake pedal. wheel (where fitted) is ve- hicle-specific. Never use the wheel on other models. Never use other models of spare wheels on your car.

178 The life span of a space- Do not use the jack to lift CHANGING A WHEEL saver spare wheel (where loads exceeding that indi- Please note: fitted) is approximately cated on the label attached 3000 km, after which it will need to the jack itself. – The jack weighs 2.05 kg. to be replaced with another spare Do not fit snow chains on space- wheel of the same type. Never fit a saver spare wheels (where fitted). – The jack requires no adjustments. standard tyre on the spare-saver If a front wheel (drive wheel) is – The jack cannot be repaired. If it spare wheel rim. punctured and you require snow breaks it must be replaced with a gen- Have the wheel replaced and re- chains to proceed, take a standard uine spare part. fitted as soon as possible. Never wheel from the rear axle and fit use two or more spare wheels at the space-saver spare wheel in its – No other tool, part from the han- the same time. place. Having fitted two standard dle, can be fitted to the jack. Do not lubricate the bolt threads wheels on the drive axle, you can The car may be equipped with a before fitting them back: they use snow chains, thus solving the regular size spare wheel. could come loose. emergency situation. The jack should only be used to The wheel cap may fly off when change a wheel on the car for the car is moving if it is not fas- which it was designed. It should tened correctly. Never tamper with not be put to other uses or em- the inflation valve. Do not insert ployed to raise other models of car. tools between the rim and the tyre. Under no circumstances should it Check the tyre and spare wheel be used when carrying out repairs pressure regularly. Tyre pressure under the car. is shown in the “Technical Speci-

An incorrectly positioned jack fications” chapter. P4T0110 may cause the car to fall.

fig. 2 179 Change the wheel as follows: 2) Engage the handbrake. 7) For cars with alloy rims: remove the clipped on wheel hub cap levering 1) Stop the car so that it is not a 3) Engage first gear or reverse. in the specific housing with the flat tip hazard for other road users or your- 4) Open the boot, lift the carpet and screwdriver provided. Then rock the self when changing the wheel. The fasten it to the edge with the specific car to make it easier to remove the ground should be as flat and firm as belt A (fig. 2). rim from the wheel hub. possible. You can remove the carpet by 8) Loosen the bolts by about half a pulling it out from the boot. Remove turn with the supplied wrench (fig. 6). the shim (fig. 3). 5) Release the locking device B (fig. 4). Take the tool kit C and the spare wheel D

P4T0281 and go to the wheel to be changed. 6) For cars with steel rims: remove the clipped on wheel cap E (fig. 5) by grasping it from the slots and pulling it outwards. Alternatively, use the flat tip screwdriver provided as a lever on the edge. fig. 3 P4T0112 P4T0113 P4T0111

fig. 4 fig. 5 fig. 6 180 9) Position the jack under the car 10) Turn the handle F on the jack 13) Work the jack with handle L near the wheel to be replaced in the (fig. 9) by hand so to open it partially (fig. 10) until the car is a few cen- points shown on the panelling under and position the jack under the car. timetres off the ground. Make sure the door: that the handle turns freely and is far 11) Extend the jack until groove G enough from the ground so that you – position 1 (fig. 7) to change a front (fig. 9) on the jack fits onto the bot- do not scrape your hands. Do not wheel tom edge H of the underbody cor- touch moving parts of the jack rectly. – position 2 (fig. 8) to change a rear (screws or joints) as they can cause wheel 12) Warn anyone nearby that the injuries. If you dirty your hands with car is about to be lifted. They must grease, clean them carefully. stay clear and not touch the car until 14) Loosen the wheel bolts and re- it is back on the ground. move the wheel. P4T0114

fig. 7 P4T0115 P4T0116 P4T0117

fig. 8 fig. 9 fig. 10 181 IMPORTANT Use the hexagonal re- 16) Put the spare wheel on, making 18) Turn the handle to lower the car cess on the upper part of the screw- sure that centring pins M (fig. 12) on and remove the jack (fig. 13). driver grip (provided) to facilitate this the hub coincide with the holes on the 19) Tighten up the wheel bolts in a operation. Insert the screwdriver bla- wheel. criss-cross fashion following the order de in the hole in the grip to handle 17) Tighten the four fastening bolts. shown (fig. 14). (fig. 11). 15) Make sure the surfaces of the IMPORTANT Use the hexagonal re- spare wheel that come into contact cess on the upper part of the screw- with the hub are clean and free from driver grip (provided) to facilitate this any impurities which could result in operation. Insert the screwdriver the wheel bolts working loose. blade in the hole in the grip to handle

(fig. 11). P4T0118

fig. 13 P4T0119 P4T0648 P4T0649

fig. 11 fig. 12 fig. 14 182 20) Fit the cup on a regular size Fasten the strap to the carpet as REFITTING THE STANDARD wheel with the inflation valve N shown (fig. 16) before refitting the WHEEL (fig. 15) at the corresponding position carpet on the floor. and press on the edge of the cup start- 1) Follow the procedure described ing from near the inflation valve. Pro- IMPORTANT Do not fit the hub above. Raise the car and remove the ceed to complete fitting. cap or the wheel cap to the space- spare wheel. saver wheel. 21) Place the removed wheel, the 2) Make sure the parts of the wheel jack and the tools in the boot and fas- that comes into contact with the hub ten appropriately. are clean and that there is no grit which could cause the wheel bolts to 22) Reposition the shim (fig. 3). work loose. 3) Fit the wheel by making the cen- tring pins on the hub A (fig. 17) fit into the holes in the rim. P4T0122 P4T0280 P4T0124

fig. 15 fig. 16 fig. 17 183 4) For cars fitted with alloy rims: 7) Tighten up the wheel bolts in a IMPORTANT Failure to fit the cap fasten the pin provided B (fig. 18) criss-cross fashion following the order properly could result in it flying off onto the hub, then fit the wheel and shown (fig. 20). when the car is moving. tighten the three bolts. Remove the 8) Position the cap on the wheel rim pin B and fasten the last bolt. with the inflation valve C (fig. 21) co- 5) Tighten the bolts using the hexa- inciding with the recess. Press all gon on upper part of the provided round the cap starting from the valve screwdriver and holding the tool with until it is fitted properly. the screwdriver blade inserted in the 9) For cars fitted with alloy rims: ex- hole on the handle (fig. 19). ert a light pressure to refit hub cap. 6) Lower the car and remove the jack. P4T0126

fig. 20 P4T0125 P4T0119 P4T0123

fig. 18 fig. 19 fig. 21 184 When you have finished: IF A BULB BURNS OUT 1) Put the spare wheel back in the boot. 2) Insert the partially open jack into Modifications or repairs Only touch the metal part the container and force it slightly so to the electrical system when handling halogen that it does not vibrate when the car carried out incorrectly and bulbs. You will reduce the is moving. without bearing the features of the light intensity and possibly com- system in mind can cause mal- promise bulb life by touching the 3) Put the tools back into the con- functions with the risk of fire. glass bulb. If you touch the bulb tainer. accidentally, rub it with a cloth moistened with alcohol and leave 4) Position the tool kit inside the it to dry. spare wheel and fix everything with device B (fig. 4). The bulbs of (Xeno) gas- discharge headlights must 5) Reposition the shim (fig. 3). be replaced by a Lancia Dealership.

Halogen bulbs contain pressurised gas which, if You should, where possi- broken, may cause small ble, have your bulbs chan- fragments of glass to be projected ged at a Lancia Dealer- outwards. ship. The correct operation and slant of headlights is essential for safe driving and compliance with legal requirements.

185 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TYPES OF BULBS

– When a light is not working, check Several types of bulbs are installed in P4T0718 that it has not fused before changing the car (fig. 22): the bulb. A Glass bulbs – For the location of the fuses, refer to Snapped into position. Pull to “If a fuse blows” in this chapter. remove. – Before replacing a bulb that does B Bayonet connection bulbs not work, check that the contacts are not oxidised. Remove from the bulb holder by pressing the bulb and rotating it – Burnt-out bulbs must be replaced anti-clockwise. with ones of the same type and power. C Cylindrical bulbs – Always check the slant of the head- light beam after changing a bulb for Remove by pulling away from safety reasons. terminals. IMPORTANT On the inside surface D - E Halogen bulbs of the headlight there could appear a slight coat of fogging; this does not To remove the bulb, release the show a defect, since it is a natural oc- clip holding the bulb in place. currence due to low temperature and to the degree of humidity in the air; it will soon disappear as soon as the lights are turned on. The presence of drops inside the headlight shows water seepage, refer to the Lancia Dealership.

fig. 22 186 BULB TYPE POWER Main beam headlights E H7 55W Dipped beam headlights E H7 55W Gas-discharge main beam and dipped beam headlights – D2R 35W Front sidelights A W5WB 5W Front direction indicators B PY21W 21W Side direction indicators A PY5W 5W Rear direction indicators B PY21W 21W Front fog lights D H1 55W Taillights B R10W 10W Brake lights B P21W 21W Third brake light (saloon) – 2.3W 2.3W Third brake light (SW) B H21W 21W Reversing light B P21W 21W Rear fog light B P21W 21W Number plate light C C5W 5W Front ceiling light C W5W 5W Courtesy lights C C10W 10W Rear side C C10W 10W Glove compartment (where fitted) C C5W 5W Boot (saloon) C C5W 5W Boot (SW) C C10W 10W Doors A W5W 5W

187 IF AN EXTERIOR BULB BURNS OUT 2) Main beam headlight 3) Front side light

The bulbs of (Xeno) gas- DIPPED AND MAIN BEAM Dipped beam headlight (fig. 25) discharge headlights must HEADLIGHTS, FRONT SIDE To replace the halogen E, 12V- H7/ be replaced by a Lancia LIGHTS Dealership. 60W bulb: The dipped beam, main beam head- 1) Remove the connector from the lights and the front side lights are bulb. housed in the front headlight cluster. 2) Release the fastening clip A and Press the upper tab A (fig. 23) and remove the bulb. remove the cover B. To refit the cover IMPORTANT For the type of bulb B, insert tab C first then press on the 3) Insert the new bulb. Make the tab to be used and the relevant power, see upper part of the cover to clip tab A B on the metal part of the bulb coin- the summary table at the previous into place. cide with the specific groove on the chapter “If a bulb needs replacing”. headlight dish. The bulbs are arranged as follows (fig. 24): 4) Refit the fastening clip and refit the connector. 1) Dipped beam headlight P4T0127 P4T0128 P4T0736

fig. 23 fig. 24 fig. 25 188 Main beam headlight (fig. 26) Front side light (fig. 27) FRONT DIRECTION To replace the bulb: To replace the bulb: INDICATORS 1) Remove the connector from the 1) Remove the bulb holder A by To replace the bulb: bulb. holding the tab and turning it slightly. 1) Turn the bulb holder A (fig. 28) 2) Release the fastening clip A and 2) Remove the bulb B by pressing it anticlockwise and remove it. remove the bulb. slightly and turning it anticlockwise. 2) Remove the bulb B by pressing 3) Insert the new bulb. Make the tab 3) Replace the bulb and refit the it lightly and turning it anticlockwise. B on the metal part of the bulb coin- clipped in bulb holder. 3) After replacing the bulb, refit the cide with the specific groove on the bulb holder on the lens. headlight dish. 4) Refit the fastening clip and refit the connector. P4T0719 P4T0131 P4T0650

fig. 26 fig. 27 fig. 28 189 FRONT FOG LIGHTS 5) Fasten clip C and insert the con- SIDE DIRECTION INDICATORS (fig. 29-30-31) nector B in the bulb. (fig. 32) To replace the bulb: 6) Refit the cover A by turning it To replace the bulb: clockwise. 1) Remove cap A by turning it anti- 1) Press the lens in direction 1, press clockwise without disconnecting the tab A and remove the cluster from the connector. front 2. 2) Remove connector B from the 2) Turn the arrow anticlockwise and bulb. remove bulb holder B. 3) Release clip C and remove the 3) Remove bulb C and replace it. bulb.

P4T0135 4) Refit the arrow in the bulb holder 4) Insert the new bulb making pins and refit the cluster by fastening the D on the metal part coincide with the rear part in recess D first. specific recesses on the dish.

fig. 30 P4T0134 P4T0136 P4T0133

fig. 29 fig. 31 fig. 32 190 REAR LIGHT CLUSTER 3) Remove the bulbs, pushing them 4) After replacing the bulbs, refit the slightly and turning them anticlock- bulb holder D and fasten with screw C. wise. Taillights, direction indicators, 5) Lower the cover B and fasten by brake lights, reversing light and E - Taillight bulb. turning knob A. rear fog light (fig. 33-34-35) F - Brake light bulb. To replace a bulb: G - Direction indicator bulb (or- 1) From inside the boot, turn knob ange). A and lift cover B. H - Reversing light (right-hand clus- 2) Loosen the screw C and remove ter only). the bulb holder D. Rear fog light (left-hand cluster only). P4T0138 P4T0139 P4T0140

fig. 33 fig. 34 fig. 35 191 NUMBER PLATE LIGHTS ADDITIONAL BRAKE LIGHT 6) Connect the electrical connector (fig. 36) (THIRD BRAKE LIGHT) C and insert it in its housing on the rear window shelf. To replace the bulb: (fig. 37-38-39) To replace a bulb: 7) Reposition the light cluster by in- 1) Loosen the screws A and remove serting tabs G in the housings H on the lens B. 1) Grasp the light cluster A by the the rear window shelf. Push it back- 2) Remove the bulb C by releasing side recesses B and remove it by wards to fit it back in place. the side contacts and replace it. pulling it forwards. 3) Refit the lens B and fasten with 2) Remove the connector C from the screws A. housing on the rear window shelf. 3) Disconnect the connector by holding the retainer pressed. P4T0277 4) Remove the additional brake light cluster D from cover E by releasing the side retainers F. 5) Insert a new additional brake light cluster in cover E so that it clips in the side retainers F. fig. 38 P4T0141 P4T0276 P4T0278

fig. 36 fig. 37 fig. 39 192 IF AN INTERIOR BULB BURNS OUT 8) Fasten screws C. 9) Refit cover B by fitting the front part first and then press on the back FRONT CEILING LIGHT 4) Lift cover E (clipped on). until it clips back. To replace a bulb: 5) Release the bulbs F (fig. 43) from the contact and replace. 1) Remove the ceiling light using a screwdriver as a lever in point A (fig. 6) Close the cover E by fastening it 40) and remove cover B. in the recess. 2) Loosen the screws C (fig. 41). 7) Refit the ceiling light by fastening clip D first and then press on the front

3) Remove the ceiling light by push- P4T0146 part to engage the tabs G (fig. 42). ing it forwards and releasing it from clip D (fig. 42). IMPORTANT When refitting the ceiling light check that the electrical wires are positioned correctly.

fig. 42 P4T0144 P4T0145 P4T0147

fig. 40 fig. 41 fig. 43 193 REAR CEILING LIGHT (fig. 44) COURTESY LIGHT (fig. 45) GLOVE COMPARTMENT LIGHT To replace a bulb: To replace a bulb: (where fitted) (fig. 46) 1) Remove the ceiling light using a 1) Remove the ceiling light using a To replace a bulb: screwdriver as a lever in point A. screwdriver as a lever in point A. 1) Remove the lens by using a 2) Remove bulb B by releasing it 2) Remove bulb B by releasing it screwdriver as a lever on clip A. from the side contacts and replace it. from the side contacts and replace it. 2) Remove bulb B by releasing it 3) Refit the ceiling light by inserting 3) Refit the ceiling light by inserting from the side contacts and replace it. side C first and pressing the other side side C first and pressing the other side 3) Refit the lens by inserting side C to engage clip D. to engage clip D. first and pressing the other side to en- gage clip A. P4T0721 P4T0149 P4T0150

fig. 44 fig. 45 fig. 46 194 BOOT LIGHT (fig. 47) DOOR LIGHTS (fig. 48-49) 4) Close shield B by clipping it into its housing. To replace a bulb: To replace an bulb: 5) Refit the lens by inserting side D 1) Remove the lens by using a 1) Remove the lens by using a first and pressing the other side to en- screwdriver as a lever on clip A. screwdriver as a lever on clip A. gage clip A. 2) Remove bulb B by releasing it 2) Press the two sides of shield B at from the side contacts and replace it. the fastening clips and turn it. 3) Refit the lens by inserting side C 3) Replace the clipped in bulb C. first and pressing the other side to en- gage clip A. P4T0151 P4T0152 P4T0153

fig. 47 fig. 48 fig. 49 195 IF A FUSE BLOWS GENERAL FUSES (MIDI AND MAXI FUSES) The car is fitted with a set of general GENERAL (fig. 50) Never change a fuse with fuses (MIDI and MAXI FUSES) which separately protect the various If an electrical device is not working, higher amperage: FIRE electrical system functions in addi- check whether the respective fuse is RISK. tional to the individual device fuses. blown. The conductor should not be broken. If it is, replace it with another The general fuses are located in the with the same amperage (same colour). engine compartment in a fusebox di- rectly connected to the positive bat- A - Undamaged fuse Before changing a fuse, tery terminal (see “Fuses in the engine B - Fuse with broken filament. check the ignition key has compartment”). been removed and that all Use the tongs C to extract a fuse to the other electrical devices have be replaced. been switch off.

If a general fuse (MIDI or MAXI FUSE) blows, do not If the fuse blows again, have the car carry out any repairs. Take inspected at a Lancia Dealership. the car to a Lancia Dealership. P4T0299

To locate the fuse, refer to the table on the following pages. The devices protected by the general fuses are listed in the tables on the fol- lowing pages. fig. 50 196 FUSES AND RELAYS Spare fuses C (fig. 52) are housed You will need to remove the fusebox IN THE FUSEBOX (where fitted) in vertical position on to reach the relays (fig. 52). Have this the right side of the fusebox. The done by a Lancia Dealership. The fuses protecting the main de- spare fuses present various amper- D - Horn relay vices are arranged in a fusebox lo- ages. cated under the dashboard on the E - Heated rear window relay right of the steering column. Remember to replace the spare fuses after replacing a fuse. F - Ignition cut-off powered devices. Open flap A (fig. 51) to access the fuses. The devices protected by the fuses in IMPORTANT Fuse 13 fig. 52 and the fusebox are listed in the tables on the specific fuse (e.g. fuse 4 fig. 52 for In some versions, symbols indicating the following pages. the right-hand dipped beam head- the main functions of the fuses in the light) must both be intact for the op- fusebox and on the auxiliary fuse eration of certain electrical utilities bracket may be shown on the inside (dipped beam headlights and of flap A. P4T0297 side/taillights). Check the conditions The fusebox also contains tongs B of fuse 13 fig. 52 along with fuses 4, (fig. 52) for removing the fuses. 6, 7 and 8 if these utilities do not work. P4T0722 P4T0154

fig. 51 fig. 52 fig. 53 197 FUSES AND RELAYS ON THE FUSES AND RELAYS IN THE In the fusebox over the battery AUXILIARY BRACKET (fig. 53) ENGINE COMPARTMENT (fig. 55-56) The auxiliary bracket is located over To reach the fuses, open cover A, the fusebox. Open flap A (fig. 51) to On the bracket in front move clips B forwards and open the reach it. of the battery (fig. 54) clipped-on cover C. G - Fog lights relay (20A) To reach the fuses and the relays, re- Tong D for removing the fuses can move the clipped-on cover A. be found in the fusebox. H - Dipped beam headlights relay (20A) B - Engine cooling fan 1st speed re- lay I - Heated seats device and control relay (50A). C - Engine cooling fan 2nd speed re- lay (excluding 1.6 version with heater Should fuses 1, 6 and 8 and 1.8 version with heater).

(fig. 53) be replaced, the P4T0296 anti-crushing safety system of the electric windows must be reinitialised. See “Electric win- dows” at chapter “Getting to know your car”. P4T0156 P4T0157

fig. 54 fig. 55 fig. 56 198 Behind the battery (fig. 57) In the service area (fig. 58-59) – Climate control compressor relay (20A) To reach the fuses, remove the cov- To reach the fuses and relays, re- ers A by releasing the fastening clips. move cover A (clipped on) by releas- – Headlight washer timer relay ing the tabs B. B - Main injection relay (30A) – Direction indicator double contact To refit the cover, insert the tabs in and centralised door locking system C - Fuel pump relay (1.8 – 2.0 ver- recesses B first and then press the relay (versions without electronic sions: 20A), (1.9 jtd - 2.4 jtd versions: lower edge to clip it on. alarm) 30A) – Diesel fuel heater relay (1.9 jtd - 2.4 jtd versions) (20A) P4T0159 P4T0160 P4T0161

fig. 57 fig. 58 fig. 59 199 EXTERIOR LIGHTS FUSE AMPERE LOCATION Right-hand main beam headlight 1 10 fig. 52 Left-hand main beam headlight 2 10 fig. 52 Right-hand dipped beam headlight 4 15 fig. 52 Left-hand dipped beam headlight 8 15 fig. 52 Right-hand and left-hand dipped beam headlight (relay enable) 15 10 fig. 53 Front right side lights (on dashboard) 6 10 fig. 52 Front left side lights (on dashboard) 7 10 fig. 52 Rear right taillights (on dashboard) 7 10 fig. 52 Left right taillights (on dashboard) 6 10 fig. 52 Reversing light 1 10 fig. 53 Reversing light (control) 1 10 fig. 53 Rear foglight 6 10 fig. 52 Right-hand brake light 6 10 fig. 52 Left-hand brake light 6 10 fig. 52 Third brake light 13 10 fig. 52 Hazard lights 14 10 fig. 52 Foglight 9 15 fig. 53 Number plate light 7 10 fig. 52 Direction indicators 13 10 fig. 52 Foglights relay control (on dashboard) 7 10 fig. 52

INTERIOR LIGHTS FUSE AMPERE LOCATION Glove compartment light (where fitted) 12 10 fig. 52 Sun visor lights 1 10 fig. 53 Passenger compartment front and rear ceiling lights 12 10 fig. 52 Door lights 12 10 fig. 52

200 INTERIOR LIGHTS FUSE AMPERE LOCATION Door controls lighting (electric windows control unit) 1 10 fig. 53 Control lights on central dashboard unit 1 10 fig. 53 Icon lights on switches 1 10 fig. 53 Door handles lighting (electric windows control unit) 1 10 fig. 53 Dashboard and climate control system lights 6 10 fig. 52 Main beam headlights warning light 2 10 fig. 52

DEVICES AND UTILITIES FUSE AMPERE LOCATION ABS (+ key) 2 10 fig. 53 ABS (control unit) – (+ key) 13 10 fig. 52 Cigar lighter 9 20 fig. 52 Cigar lighter (enable relay) 10 7.5 fig. 53 Air bag 3 10 fig. 53 Diagnostic socket power 12 10 fig. 52 Electronic injection utilities power (1.8 - 1.9 jtd - 2.4 jtd versions) 2 7.5 fig. 57 Electronic injection utilities power 1 15 fig. 57 Electronic injection utilities power (2.0 versions) 2 15 fig. 57 Electronic alarm (+ key) 1 10 fig. 53 Electronic alarm (control unit and remote control receiver) 12 10 fig. 52 Front electric window winders 6 25 fig. 53 Rear electric window winders 8 25 fig. 53 Rear electrical window winders (control unit) 1 10 fig. 53 Sound system 3 20 fig. 52 1 10 fig. 53

201 DEVICES AND UTILITIES FUSE AMPERE LOCATION Boot (tailgate opening) 7 20 fig. 53 Front electric window winders/centralised door locking system control unit 1 10 fig. 53 Injection electronic control unit. 4 7.5 fig. 53 Centralised door locking system 3 20 fig. 52 Horn 11 20 fig. 52 Climate control system (control unit) 10 7.5 fig. 53 Climate control system (lighting) 6 10 fig. 52 Climate control compressor 5 20 fig. 52 Headlight slant corrector (enable) 8 10 fig. 52 Headlight automatic slant corrector (control unit) 1 10 fig. 53 Cruise control 13 10 fig. 52 Engine cooling fans (relay enable) 4 7.5 fig. 53 BOSE HI-FI system 11 25 fig. 53 Clutch switch (1.9jtd - 2.4jtd versions) 1 10 fig. 53 Windscreen washer 10 20 fig. 52 Headlight washer 5 20 fig. 52 Headlight washer (enable) 8 10 fig. 52 Headlight washer (relay enable) 10 7.5 fig. 53 Rear window washer (relay enable) 10 7.5 fig. 53 Heated rear window (relay enable) 10 7.5 fig. 53 Heated rear window (defrosting) 15 30 fig. 52 MAXI FUSE: glow plug preheating power (1.9jtd - 2.4jtd versions) 8 70 fig. 56 MAXI FUSE: ignition switch (ignition switch powered devices) 2 30 fig. 56 MAXI FUSE: engine cooling fan power (1.6 version with climate control system - 1.9jtd - 2.4jtd versions) 6 60 fig. 56

202 DEVICES AND UTILITIES FUSE AMPERE LOCATION MAXI FUSE: engine cooling fan power (1.6 with climate control system - 1.8 with heater versions) 7 30 fig. 56 MAXI FUSE: engine cooling fan power (1.8 with climate control system versions) 6 50 fig. 56 MAXI FUSE: engine cooling fan power (2.0 versions) 6 60 fig. 56 MAXI FUSE: engine cooling fan power (1.9 with climate control system - 2.4jtd versions) 7 40 fig. 56 MAXI FUSE: engine electronic injection fuses and relays 5 30 fig. 56 MAXI FUSE: fuse no. 5-6-7-9-10-11-12-14-15 power (in fusebox) (fig. 52) 1 80 fig. 56 MAXI FUSE: fuse no. 3-4-8 power (in fusebox) (fig. 52 ) and fuse no. 6-7-8-9-11-12-13-14 (on auxiliary fuse bracket) (fig. 53) 3 70 fig. 56 MAXI FUSE: climate control system power 4 40 fig. 56 MIDI FUSE: additional heater power (1.9jtd - 2.4jtd versions) 10 70 fig. 56 MIDI FUSE: ABS system power 9 60 fig. 56 Navigator (display) 1 10 fig. 53 Current socket in passenger compartment 5 15 fig. 53 Instrument light dimmer 1 10 fig. 53 Centralised door locking system/alarm remote control receiver 1 10 fig. 53 Diesel fuel heater (1.9jtd - 2.4jtd versions) – 20 fig. 59 Electric driver's seat with memory 12 25 fig. 53 Electrical passenger's seat 13 30 fig. 53 Front seats (heating) 14 20 fig. 53

203 DEVICES AND UTILITIES FUSE AMPERE LOCATION

Electrical seats (memory/rearview mirror control unit 10 7.5 fig. 53 Electrical seats (movement/heating movement relay enable) 10 7.5 fig. 53 Climate control system pollution sensor 10 7.5 fig. 53 Windscreen wiper rain sensor 1 10 fig. 53 Windscreen wiper rain sensor (control unit relay enable) 10 7.5 fig. 53 LANCIA ICS (display) 14 10 fig. 52 Lancia CODE system 4 7.5 fig. 53 – 7.5 fig. 59 Automatically adjustable internal rearview mirror 1 10 fig. 53 External rearview mirrors (defroster relay enable) 10 7.5 fig. 53 External rearview mirrors (movement) 1 10 fig. 53 External rearview mirrors (defrosting) 15 30 fig. 52 Instruments 13 10 fig. 52 Cellular phone set-up 3 20 fig. 52 1 10 fig. 53 Windscreen wiper/washer and headlight washer 10 20 fig. 52 Rear window washer/wiper (SW) 10 20 fig. 52 Rear window washer/wiper (SW) (relay enable). 10 7.5 fig. 53 Sunroof 7 20 fig. 53 Sunroof (enable) 10 7.5 fig. 53

204 IF THE BATTERY the system by turning the emergency JACKING key to “OFF” (see “Electronic alarm” IS FLAT in “Getting to know your car”). THE CAR 2) Connect the charger cables to the JUMP STARTING battery terminals. WITH THE JACK See “Jump starting” in this chapter. 3) Turn on the charger. See “If a tyre is punctured” in this chapter. Under no circumstances 4) When you have finished, turn the should a battery charger charger off before disconnecting the be used to start the engine: battery. it could damage the electronic sys- 5) Reconnect the cables to the bat- The jack should only be tems and in particular the ignition tery terminals. Make sure the polarity used to change a wheel on and injection control units. is correct. the car for which it was designed. It should not be put to other uses or employed to raise The liquid in the battery RECHARGING THE BATTERY other models. Under no circum- is poisonous and corrosive. stances should it be used when You are advised to recharge the bat- Do not let it touch the skin carrying out repairs under the car. tery slowly for a period of approxi- or eyes. Recharging the battery An incorrectly positioned jack may mately 24 hours at a low amperage. should be done in a well– venti- cause the car to fall. Do not use the Charging for too long could damage lated area away from naked jack to lift loads exceeding that in- the battery. flames or possible sources of dicated on the label attached to the sparks: explosion and fire risk. Proceed as follows: jack itself.

1) Disconnect the electrical system Please note: from the battery terminals. IMPORTANT If the battery is flat, – The jack requires no adjustments; IMPORTANT Where relevant, the anti-crushing safety device of the – The jack cannot be repaired. If it switch the electronic car alarm off electric windows could be reini- breaks it must be replaced with a new with the remote control and deactivate tialised. See “Electric windows” at jack; chapter “Getting to know your car”.

205 – No other tool, part from the han- TOWING THE CAR dle shown in this chapter, can be fit- ted to the jack. IMPORTANT Respect the local Carefully clean the WITH A SHOP JACK OR AN rules for towing the car. threading before fastening ARM HOIST the tow ring B. Make sure The car is provided with a front (fig. 62) that the tow hitch is fully fastened The car can only be jacked up by and rear (fig. 63) attachments for fas- (by at least eleven thread turns). positioning the jack arm under the tening the tow ring. front A riser (fig. 60) or the rear riser B (fig. 61) and placing a suitably To fit the tow ring, remove the sized piece of wood in between. bumper cover by using a screwdriver

as a lever in point A. P4T0164

Be very careful not to squeeze the brake pipes, the fuel pipes or the side- member ribbing. fig. 62 P4T0162 P4T0163 P4T0165

fig. 60 fig. 61 fig. 63 206 When towing the car, you IF AN ACCIDENT – Remove the ignition keys from the must comply with the spe- vehicles involved. cific traffic regulations re- OCCURS – If you can smell petrol or other garding the tow ring and how to chemicals, do not smoke and make tow on the road. Before starting to – It is important to keep calm. sure all cigarettes are extinguished. tow, turn the ignition key to MAR and then to STOP. Do not remove – If you are not directly involved in – Use a fire extinguisher, blanket, the key. If the key is removed, the the accident, stop at least ten metres sand or earth to put out fires no mat- steering lock engages automati- away from the accident. ter how small they are. Never use wa- cally which prevents the wheels – If you are on a motorway, do not ter. being turned. While the car is be- obstruct the emergency lane with your – In pile– ups on the motorway, par- ing towed with the engine off, re- car. member that the brake pedal and ticularly when the visibility is bad, steering will require more effort as – Turn off the engine and turn on there is a high risk of other vehicles you no longer have the benefit of the hazard lights. running into those already stopped. the power brakes and power steer- Get out of the car immediately and – At night, illuminate the scene of take refuge behind the guard rail. ing. Do not use flexible cables to the accident with your headlights. tow. Avoid jerking. Whilst towing, – If the doors are blocked, do not at- ensure that the coupling to the car – Act carefully, you must not risk tempt to smash the windscreen to get does not damage the surrounding being run over. out of the car. It is made of layered components. – Mark the accident by putting the glass and is very hard. Side and rear red triangle at the regulatory distance windows are much more easily bro- from the car where it can be clearly ken. seen. – Call for rescue making the infor- mation you give as accurate as you Do not tow the car with can. On the motorway use the special the engine running. column– mounted emergency phones.

207 IF ANYONE IS INJURED FIRST-AID KIT – Never leave the injured person It is a good idea to keep a fire extin- alone. The obligation to provide as- guisher and blanket in the car in ad- sistance exists even for those not di- dition to the first-aid kit. rectly involved in the accident. – Do not congregate around the in- jured person. – Reassure the injured person that help is on its way and will arrive soon. Stay close by to calm him/her down in case of panic. – Unfasten or cut seat belts holding injured parties. – Do not give an injured person any- thing to drink. – Do not move an injured person un- less the following situations arise. – Pull the injured person from the car only if it risks catching fire, it is sinking in water or is likely to fall over a cliff or similar. Do not pull his/her arms or legs, do not bend the head and, as far as possible, keep the body horizontal.

208 CAR MAINTENANCE

Lancia Lybra is brand new throughout, even SCHEDULED SERVICING ...... 210 in its servicing schedule. Its first service sched- SERVICE SCHEDULE ...... 211 ule coupon is to be used only at 20,000 km. ANNUAL INSPECTION SCHEDULE ...... 213 You should still, however, check the level of the ADDITIONAL CHECKS ...... 213 various liquids and tyre pressure regularly. CHECKING FLUID LEVELS...... 215 AIR CLEANER ...... 221 You should nonetheless bear in mind that the POLLEN FILTER ...... 222 proper maintenance of your car is certainly the DIESEL FILTER ...... 222 best way to keep it in tip-top condition for BATTERY ...... 222 years to come and safeguard its performance ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS...... 225 and safety features, while respecting the envi- ronment and keeping running costs down. SPARK PLUGS...... 226 WHEELS AND TYRES ...... 227 Also remember that the following servicing RUBBER TUBING ...... 228 regulations marked with the symbol are WINDSCREEN WIPERS ...... 228 essential to ensure the warranty remains valid. HEADLIGHT WASHERS ...... 230 CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ...... 230 BODYWORK ...... 231 INTERIORS...... 233

209 SCHEDULED SERVICING IMPORTANT You are recom- mended to get in touch with a Lan- cia Dealership immediately if any minor running problems crop up Correct maintenance of the car is es- IMPORTANT The Manufacturer without waiting for the next coupon. sential for ensuring it stays in tip-top requires the Service Schedule coupon- condition for a long time to come. related checks to be carried out. Fail- ure to do so could result in the war- This is why LANCIA has pro- ranty being cancelled for those defects grammed a number of service opera- that can be attributed to such failure. tions every 20,000 kilometres. Scheduled Servicing is performed at all Lancia Dealership and there is a set time scale for such operations. If it is seen that further replacements or repairs are necessary in addition to the work being carried out, these will only be done after the customer has given his/her consent.

210 SERVICE SCHEDULE

thousands of kilometres 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180

Check tyre conditions and wear; adjust pressure, if required ççççç çççç Check light operation (headlights, direction indicators, hazard lights, boot, passenger compartment, oddment compartments, instrument panel warning lights, etc.) ççççç çççç Check windscreen and rear window wiper operation and adjust nozzles ççççç çççç Check position and wear of windscreen/rear window blades ççççç çççç Check front disc brake pad wear warning light operation ççççç çççç Check rear drum brake shoe wear çççç Inspect conditions of: outside bodywork, underbody protection, piping/hosing (exhaust - fuel lines - brake lines), rubber parts (boots, sleeves, bushings, etc.) ççççç çççç Check for bonnet and boot lock cleanness, lever cleanness and lubrication ççççç çççç Check conditions of accessory drive belts and/or poly-V belts çç ç Check handbrake lever stroke çççç Check/adjust tappet clearance (jtd versions) çç ç ç ç Check diesel engine smokiness in exhaust (jtd versions) çççç Replace fuel filter (jtd versions) ççççç çççç

211 thousands of kilometres 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180

Check fuel evaporation system operation çç Replace air cleaner cartridge (petrol versions) çççç Replace air cleaner cartridge (jtd versions) ççççç çççç Check and top up fluids (engine coolant, brakes, windscreen washer, battery, etc.) ççççç çççç Inspect conditions of timing belt çç Replace timing belt (*) ç Replace accessory drive poly-V belt ç Replace spark plugs (petrol versions) çççç Check engine control systems via diagnostic socket (through diagnosis socket) çççç Check gearbox oil level çç Change engine oil ççççç çççç Replace engine oil filter ççççç çççç Change brake fluid (or every 2 years) ççç Replace dust/pollen filter (or every year) ççççç çççç (*) Or every three years, in the event of demanding use (cold climate, use in cities, long idling, dusty areas) Or every five years, regardless of the distance travelled.

212 ANNUAL INSPECTION SCHEDULE ADDITIONAL CHECKS The following annual inspection – Inspect conditions of. engine, gear- Every 1,000 km or before long trips, schedule is recommended for cars box, transmission, piping (exhaust - check and top up as necessary: travelling less than 20,000 km a fuel feed - brakes), rubber parts year (e.g. approximately 10,000 (boots - sleeves - bushings - etc.), – engine coolant level km). The schedule includes the brake and fuel line hoses. – brake/hydraulic clutch fluid level following operations: – Check battery charge status. – power steering fluid level – Check tyre condition and wear and – Check conditions of various con- – windscreen/rear window washer adjust pressure, if required (including trol belts. liquid level spare wheel). – tyre pressure and conditions. – Check and top up fluid levels (en- – Check operation of lights (head- gine coolant, brakes, windscreen You are recommended to use the lights, direction indicators, hazard washer, battery, etc.). products designed and produced lights, boot light, passenger compart- specifically for LANCIA cars (see ment ceiling light, glove compartment – Change engine oil. “Capacities” in “Technical specifica- light, instrument panel lights, etc.). – Replace engine oil filter. tions”). – Check windscreen wiper/washer – Replace pollen filter. Every 3,000 km check the engine and adjust nozzles. oil level and top up as necessary. – Check position wear of wind- screen/rear window wiper blades. – Check front brake pad conditions and wear. – Check for bonnet and boot lock cleanness, lever cleanness and lubri- cation

213 Maintenance of your car IMPORTANT - Air cleaner IMPORTANT - Battery should be entrusted to a Replace the air cleaner more fre- The charge in your battery should be Lancia Dealership. For or- quently if the car is used on dusty checked, where possible at the start of dinary routine maintenance oper- roads. the winter, to limit the risk of the bat- ations which you are able to carry tery electrolyte freezing. out yourself, ensure that you have If you are in doubt about how often the necessary tools and original the engine oil or the air cleaner should This check should be carried out Lancia spare parts and fluids be changed in relation to how you use more frequently if the car is mainly available. Do not carry out servic- the car, contact a Lancia Dealer- used for short trips or if it is fitted ing operations if you have no ex- ship. with accessories that permanently perience. take in electricity even when the igni- tion key is removed, especially in the IMPORTANT - Diesel filter case of after market accessories. IMPORTANT - Engine oil The different grades of purity in If the car is used in very hot climates diesel fuel normally available might or particularly demanding conditions Change the engine oil more fre- make it necessary to replace the filter quently than shown in the Service check the battery electrolyte more fre- more frequently that indicated in the quently than shown in the “Service Schedule is the car is normally driven Service Schedule. If the engine mis- in one of the following particularly se- Schedule” in the “Car maintenance” fires it shows the filter needs chang- chapter. vere conditions: ing. – towing a trailer IMPORTANT - Pollen/dust filter – on dirty roads If the car is often used in dusty or – for short, repeated trips (less than extremely polluted environments, you 7-8 km) with outside temperature be- should change the filter element more low zero frequently. It should be changed es- – with engine frequently idling or for pecially if the amount of air intro- long distances at low speed (e.g. taxi, duced into the passenger compart- door-to-door deliveries, prolonged ment is introduced. storage).

214 CHECKING FLUID LEVELS P4T0651

Do not smoke while working in the engine compartment: the presence of flammable gas and vapour could cause a fire.

Be careful not to mix up the various types of fluids fig. 1 - 1.6 version when you are topping up: they are all mutually incompatible and could damage the car. P4T0652

1. Engine oil - 2. Battery - 3. Brake fluid - 4. Windscreen washer fluid - 5. Engine coolant - 6. Power steering fluid. fig. 2 - 1.8 version 215 P4T0653

1. Engine oil - 2. Battery - 3. Brake fluid - 4. Windscreen washer fluid - 5. Engine coolant - 6. Power steering fluid. fig. 3 - 2.0 version P4T0654

1. Engine oil - 2. Battery - 3. Brake fluid - 4. Windscreen washer fluid - 5. Engine coolant - 6. Power steering fluid. fig. 4 - 1.9 jtd version 216 P4T0655

1. Engine oil - 2. Battery - 3. Brake fluid - 4. Windscreen washer fluid - 5. Engine coolant - 6. Power steering fluid. fig. 5 - 2.4 jtd version

217 ENGINE OIL (fig. 6-7-8-9-10) Be very careful under the In 1.6 version, lift the upper part of bonnet: you risk burning the cap and remove it. Check engine oil with the car on yourself. Remember that level ground and while the engine is During the beginning of the car’s life when the engine is hot, the fan can still warm (approximately five min- the engine is be tuned in. Engine oil start up and cause injuries. utes after stopping the engine). consumption can only be considered stabilised after the first 5,000 - 6,000 The oil level should be included be- km. tween the MIN and MAX reference lines on the dipstick. If the oil level is near or even below the MIN line, pour in oil through the

filler hole until it reaches the MAX P4T0657 P4T0659 line. The oil level must never exceed the MAX line.

fig. 7 - 1.8 version fig. 9 - 1.9 jtd version P4T0656 P4T0658 P4T0660

fig. 6 - 1.6 version fig. 8 - 2.0 version fig. 10 - 2.4 jtd version 218 Do not add oil with dif- ENGINE COOLANT The engine cooling sys- ferent specifications from (fig. 11) tem works with PARAFLU the oil already in the en- UP. Top up only with the gine. Only the use of semi-syn- same fluid contained in the cool- thetic oil (see “Lubricant and fluid Do not remove the reser- ing circuit. PARAFLU UP cannot specifications” in the “Technical voir cap when the engine is be mixed with other fluids. Should specification” chapter) can ensure hot: you risk scalding your- this take place, do not start the en- the distances prescribed in the self. gine and contact Lancia Dealer- Service Schedule. ship.

Check coolant level when the engine is cold. The level should be included IMPORTANT After topping up or between the MIN and MAX reference changing the oil, let the engine turn lines on the reservoir. for a few seconds and wait a few min- The cooling system is utes after stopping it before you check If the level is low, top up slowly pressurised. If necessary, the level. through the filler A on the reservoir replace the cap with a gen- with a 50-50% mixture of distilled uine spare part to avoid compro- water and PARAFLU UP fluid as re- mising the system efficiency. quired. Used engine oil and re- placed oil filters contain substances which can harm the environment. We recommend P4T0170 P4T0171 you have the car seen to at a Lan- cia Dealership for the oil and filter change. It is suitably equipped for disposing of used oil and filters in an environmentally-friendly way that complies with the law.

fig. 11 fig. 12 219 WINDSCREEN/REAR POWER STEERING FLUID Oil consumption is extremely low. If WINDOW/HEADLIGHT (fig. 13-14) the oil level needs topping up again a WASHER FLUID (fig. 12) s short period of time, have the sys- Check the oil level when the engine tem checked for leakage at a Lancia To top up, remove cap A and filler is cold. It should be included between Dealership. B and pour in a mixture of water and the MIN and MAX reference lines on the reservoir. TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35 BRAKE AND HYDRAULIC fluid in the following concentrations: When the oil is hot, the level can ex- CLUTCH FLUID (fig. 15) 30% of TUTELA PROFESSIONAL ceed the MAX reference line. Check that the level of the fluid in SC 35 and 70% of water in summer. To top up, loosen cap A and pour oil the reservoir is at the MAX line. 50% of TUTELA PROFESSIONAL into the reservoir. From time to time check the instru- SC 35 and 50% of water in winter. IMPORTANT Make sure that the oil ment panel warning light by pressing If the temperature falls below –20°C, has the same specifications as the oil the reservoir cap (with the ignition use TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC in the system. key at MAR), the warning light x 35 undiluted. should come on. Do not let the power Use DOT 4 fluid only for topping IMPORTANT Do not travel with steering fluid come into up. We recommend TUTELA TOP 4 the windscreen washer reservoir contact with hot engine that the braking system was original empty. The windscreen washer is fun- parts. It catches fire very easily. filled with. damental for improving visibility. P4T0661 P4T0172 P4T0173

fig. 13 - 1.6 version fig. 14 - 1.8 - 2.0 fig. 15 1.9 jtd - 2.4 jtd versions 220 Loosen cap A holding sensor B still. AIR CLEANER Replace the air cleaner more frequently than shown The fluid level in the reservoir should in the Service Schedule if never exceed the MAX reference line. The air cleaner is connected to the air temperature and intake sensors the car is used on dusty roads. IMPORTANT Brake fluid is hygro- which send the electrical signals re- scopic (meaning it absorbs humidity). quired for the correct operation of the This is why the fluid should be injection and ignition system to the changed more frequently than shown control unit. The cleaner can be dam- in the Service Schedule if the car is Consequently, the cleaner must al- aged if it is cleaned and mainly driven in areas with a high ways be in perfect conditions to en- consequently the engine percentage of humidity in the air. sure correct operation of the engine can be damaged. and in order to contain consumption Make sure that the highly and exhaust emissions. corrosive brake fluid does not drip onto the paint- REPLACEMENT (fig. 16) work. If it does, wash it off imme- Loosen the screws A, lift the cover B diately with water. The air cleaner replace- ment procedure is pro- and remove the filtering element to be vided for indicative pur- replaced. poses only. Have the operation carried out at a Lancia Dealership. Car safety can be compromised if The symbol π on the

the cleaner replacement procedure P4T0174 container indicates syn- herein described is not carried out thetic brake fluid distin- correctly. guishing it from mineral fluid. Us- ing mineral type fluid would dam- age the special rubber braking system gaskets beyond repair.

fig. 16 221 POLLEN FILTER DIESEL FILTER BATTERY (1.9 jtd - 2.4 jtd versions) Have the pollen filter (fig. 17) re- The battery is located in the engine placed at a Lancia Dealership. compartment in point 2 (fig. 1, 2, 3, DRAINING THE CONDENSE 4, 5). If the car is often used in dusty or (fig. 18) extremely polluted environments, you The battery is of the “limited main- should change the filter element more The presence of water in tenance” type. Under normal condi- frequently. It should be changed es- the fuel feed circuit can se- tions it will not need to be topped up pecially if the amount of air intro- verely damage the injec- with distilled water. duced into the passenger compart- tion system and make the engine See “ In an emergency” for instruc- ment is introduced. misfire. Go to a Lancia Dealership tions on how to recharge the battery. as soon as possible when the c warning light comes on to have the bleeding operation carried out. P4T0175 P4T0662

fig. 17 fig. 18 222 REPLACING THE BATTERY CHECKING THE BATTERY USEFUL ADVICE FOR If required, replace the battery with FLUID LEVEL (electrolyte) LENGTHENING THE LIFE a genuine spare part presenting the Check the electrolyte level and top OF YOUR BATTERY same specifications. up, if required, at the frequency When you park the car, ensure the shown in the “Service schedule” in doors, boot and bonnet are closed this chapter. Have this operation car- properly. The ceiling lights must be ried out at a Lancia Dealership. off. Should the battery be re- placed, the anti-crushing Do not keep accessories (e.g. sound safety system of the electric system, hazard lights etc.) switched windows must be reinitialised. See on for a long time when the engine is “Electric windows” at chapter not running. “Getting to know your car”. The liquid in the battery IMPORTANT A battery which is If a battery with different specifica- is poisonous and corrosive. kept at a charge of less than 50% for tions is fitted, the frequencies shown Do not let it touch the skin any length of time will be damaged by in the “Service schedule” in this chap- or eyes. Do not bring naked flames sulphation leading to a reduction in ter will no longer apply. Refer to the or possible sources of sparks near cranking power and a higher risk of instructions provided by the battery to the battery: risk of fire and ex- the battery electrolyte freezing (this manufacturer. plosion. may even occur at –10°C). If the car is inactive for a long period Batteries contain sub- of time, refer to “Storing the car” in stances that are very harm- the chapter “Getting to know your ful for the environment. car”. You are advised to have the battery Incorrect fitting of elec- changed at a Lancia Dealership. It trical and electronic acces- is properly equipped for disposing sories can seriously dam- of used batteries in an environ- age the car. mentally-friendly way that com- plies with the law.

223 If you want to add accessories after Battery Maximum BATTERY WITH HYDROMETER buying the car (alarm, free – hand idle intake Description phone kit, radio navigator and anti– 50 Ah 30 mA theft system, etc.) visit a Lancia For versions/markets where applic- Dealership. They can suggest the 60 Ah 36 mA able, the battery can be fitted with an most suitable accessories to get and 70 Ah 42 mA indicator for checking the electrolyte check whether the electric system can level and battery charge. The battery support the required load or whether is of the “Low Maintenance” type fit- a larger capacity battery and alterna- It is also important to remember that ted with an indicator; therefore, un- tor are required. high intake devices (such as bottle der normal conditions of use topping These devices in fact in take elec- warmers, vacuum cleaners, cellular up the electrolyte with distilled water tricity also when the ignition key is re- phones, etc.) will speed up battery is not required. A periodical check is moved (car parked, engine off) and discharging when powered when however necessary to make sure it is can gradually drain the battery. the engine is not running. in efficient conditions through the in- dicator on the battery cover which The overall intake of these devices IMPORTANT Please note that should be dark in colour with a green (standard and after-market) must be when installing additional systems in central area. less that 0.6 mA x Ah (of the battery), the car incorrect wiring can be dan- as shown in the following table. If the indicator is a bright colour, or gerous, especially when concerning dark without the green central area, safety systems. contact a Lancia Dealership.

224 Checking the battery charge cator, proceed as described in the ELECTRONIC table below or on the label on the bat- The quality of the battery charge tery. CONTROL UNITS can be checked through the indicator. Depending on the colour of the indi- When the car is being used nor- mally, special measures are not nec- essary. The following instructions must be followed very carefully, however, if you work on the electrical system or in cases where emergency starting is Bright Top up Contact a Lancia Dealership necessary: white colour electrolyte – Never disconnect the battery from the electrical system while the engine is running. Dark colour Low battery Charge the battery (advisable to without charge contact a Lancia Dealership) – Disconnect the battery from the green central area electrical system if you are recharging it. The modern battery chargers can discharge voltage up to 20V. Dark colour with Electrolyte level No action needed green and charge sufficient – Never perform emergency start– central area ups with a battery charger. Always use an auxiliary battery. – Be particularly careful when con- necting the battery to the electrical system. Make sure that the polarity is correct and that the connection is ef- ficient.

225 – Do not connect or disconnect the SPARK PLUGS The spark plugs must be terminals of the electronic units while changed at the times spec- the ignition key is at MAR. The cleanness and soundness of the ified in the Service Sched- ule. Only use the type of plugs in- – Do not check polarity through spark plugs (fig. 19) are very impor- dicated. If the heat ratio is less sparking. tant for keeping the engine efficient and polluting emissions down. than required or the life specified – Disconnect the electronic units if is not guaranteed, problems can you are electrically welding the car The appearance of the spark plug, if arise. body. Remove the units if tempera- examined by an expert eyes, is a good tures exceed 80°C (special operations way of pinpointing a problem even if on the bodywork, etc.). it has nothing to do with the ignition system. Therefore, if the engine has Spark plug problems, it is important to have the spark plugs checked at a Lancia LANCIA RC10YCC Dealership. LANCIA BKR5EZ 1.6 Champion RC10YCC NGK BKR5EZ LANCIA RC10YCC Modifications or repairs to the electrical system LANCIA BKR6EZ 1.8 carried out incorrectly and Champion RC10YCC

without bearing the features of the P4T0240 system in mind can cause mal- NGK BKR6EZ functions with the risk of fire. LANCIA RC8BYC 2.0 Champion RC8BYC

fig. 19 226 WHEELS A - Correct pressure: tyre wears IMPORTANT evenly As far as possible avoid sharp brak- AND TYRES B - Under inflated tyre: shoulder ing and screech starts. tread wear Be careful not to hit the kerb, pot- C – Over-inflated tyre: centre tread TYRE PRESSURE holes or other obstacles hard. Driving wear. Check the pressure of each tyre, in- for long stretches over bumpy roads cluding the spare, every two weeks or can damage the tyres. so (every month anyway) and before Periodically check that the tyres long journeys. If the pressure is too low have no cuts in the sidewalls, abnor- The pressure must be checked when the tyre overheats and this mal swelling or irregular tyre wear. If the tyre is rested and cold. can cause it serious dam- any of these occur, have the car seen age. to at a Lancia Dealership. It is normal for the pressure to rise when you are driving. If you have to Avoid overloading your car: this can check or restore the pressure when the seriously damage wheels and tyres. tyres are warm, remember that the Tyres must be replaced when the tread wears down to 1.6 mm. In any If you get a flat tyre, stop immedi- pressure value must be 0.3 bar above ately and change it so as not to dam- the specified value. case, comply with the laws in the country where the car is being driven. age the tyre, the wheel, the suspension and the steering. Tyres age even if they are not used Tyre pressure must be very much. Cracking of the tread rub-

correct to ensure good P4T0239 ber and the sidewalls are a sign of this road holding. ageing.

Wrong pressure causes uneven wear of the tyres (fig. 20):

fig. 20 227 In any case, if the tyres have been RUBBER TUBING WINDSCREEN fitted for more than six years they should be examined by an expert who Follow the Service Schedule to the WIPERS can judge whether they are still fit for letter as concerns braking, power use. Remember to check the spare steering and fuel line rubber tubing. BLADES tyre particularly carefully too. Ozone, high temperatures and long Periodically clean the rubber part If a replacement is necessary, always absence of fluid in the system can in with suitable products. We recom- use new tyres and avoid using ones fact cause the hardening and crack- mend TUTELA PROFESSIONAL the origin of which you are not certain ing of the pipes with possible loss of SC 35. about. fluid. A careful check is therefore es- Change the blades if the rubber edge sential. The car fits tubeless tyres. Under no is warped or worn out. You should in circumstances use an inner tube with any case change them approximately these tyres. once a year. If you replace a tyre it is a good idea Travelling with worn to change the inflation valve, too. wiper blades is dangerous To ensure the front and rear tyres all because it reduces visibil- wear evenly, you are advised to ity in bad weather. change the tyres over every 10-15 thousand kilometres keeping them on the same side of the car so as not to reverse the direction of rotation. Some simple steps can reduce po- tential damage to the blades: – If the temperature falls to below Do not change the tyres zero, make sure the rubber blade is over in criss-cross fashion not frozen to the windscreen. If neces- by moving a tyre from the sary, free it with a de-icing compound. left hand side of the car to the right and vice versa.

228 – Remove any snow that has settled 2) If the blades are intact, continue 3) Insert the new blade in the wind- on the glass: besides saving the blades by checking the operation. Operate screen wiper arm until the lock spring you will avoid straining the electric the windscreen washer and the clicks. windscreen wiper motor and causing wipers. If the blades clean the wind- it to overheat. screen perfectly they can be kept. If IMPORTANT After replacing, make not, replace them both. sure that the blades are correctly fas- – Do not operate the windscreen tened to the windscreen wiper arm. wipers on dry glass. Replacing the blades (fig. 21) Checking the blades To replace rear window wiper blades in Station Wagon versions, refer to the Before checking, clean the wind- specific chapter. screen and rubber blades carefully with warm water and TUTELA To replace the windscreen wiper PROFESSIONAL SC 35 windscreen blades: washing fluid. The windscreen should 1) Lift the windscreen wiper arm. be perfectly clean and not greasy. If required, complete the cleaning oper- 2) Press the lock spring tab and re- ation with degreasing products (am- move the blade A from arm B. monia based) or degreasing polishes. The blades must also be perfectly clean before starting the check. If re- quired, clean the corners with warm water and soap. P4T0228 1) Check the blades carefully. They should not be broken or damaged in any part. Replace both the blades if they are broken or damaged.

fig. 21 229 SPRAY NOZZLES (fig. 22) HEADLIGHT CLIMATE If there is no jet of liquid, first make sure that there is liquid in the reser- WASHERS (where fitted) CONTROL SYSTEM voir (see “Checking fluid levels” in Regularly check that the nozzles this chapter). During the winter, the climate con- (fig. 23) are intact and clean. trol system must be turned on at least Then make sure that the holes in the The headlight washers are automat- once a month for about ten minutes. nozzles are not clogged up. Use a pin ically switched on when the wind- Before summer, have the system for this if necessary. screen washer is operated and the checked at a Lancia Dealership. The windscreen washer jets A can be headlights are on. directed by adjusting the inclination of the nozzles. Direct the spray so that it reaches the highest point reached by the blades. The system is filled with R134a refrigerant which will not pollute the envi- ronment in the event of leakage. Under no circumstances should R12 fluid be used as it is incom- patible with the system compo- nents and contains CFCS. P4T0176 P4T0274

fig. 22 fig. 23 230 BODYWORK – The use of zinc-plated sheet steel TIPS FOR KEEPING THE BODY which is highly resistant to rust. IN GOOD CONDITIONS – The spraying of the underbody, PROTECTING THE CAR FROM engine compartment, inside the Paintwork ATMOSPHERIC AGENTS wheelhouses and other parts with The paintwork is not only to make The main causes of rust are: wax– based products with a high pro- your car look attractive but also to tective capacity. – atmospheric pollution protect the steel. – Spraying plastic-coating materials – salt and humidity in the atmos- If the paint is scuffed or scratched to protect the most exposed points: deeply you are therefore advised to phere (coastal or very hot and humid under the door, inside the wings, the areas) touch up as necessary to prevent rust edges etc. from forming. – environmental conditions that are – The use of “open” box sections to specific to the season. Only use genuine products when prevent condensation and water from touching up the paintwork (see the In addition, the abrasiveness of dust building up and rusting the inside of “Technical specifications” chapter). in the atmosphere and sand carried the parts. by the wind as well as mud and stones Ordinary maintenance of the paint- kicked up by other cars must not be BODY AND UNDERBODY work means washing it. The fre- quency you should do this depends on underestimated. WARRANTY the conditions and the environment For your Lybra, LANCIA has used Your Lybra is covered by warranty the car is driven in. For example, you leading– edge technological solutions against any original structural or body should wash your car more often if it to effectively protect the body from part being perforated by rust. Refer to is driven is areas with a high level of rust. the Warranty Booklet for the general air pollution or on road sprinkled with terms. saltwash. These are the most important: – Painting systems and products that make the car particularly resis- tant to rust and scratching.

231 Detergents pollute water. Do not wash the car after it has been Engine compartment For this reason, the car parked in the sun or while the bonnet At the end of each winter season, must be washed in an area is hot: it could take the shine off the carefully clean the engine compart- equipped for the collection and paint. ment. Have this done at a garage. purification of the liquids used Outside plastic parts must be while washing. IMPORTANT The engine com- cleaned following the usual car wash- partment should be washed while the ing procedure. engine is cold and with the ignition To wash the car properly: Where possible avoid parking the key at STOP. After washing, make 1) Remove the aerial from the roof car under trees; the resinous sub- sure that the various protections (e.g. to prevent damaging it when washing stances that certain species of tree rubber boots and various guards) the car in an automatic carwash. shed dull the paintwork and increase have not be removed or damaged. the possibility of rust forming. 2) Wash the body using a low pres- sure jet of water. IMPORTANT Bird droppings must 3) Wipe a sponge with a slightly be washed off immediately and with Detergents pollute water. soapy solution over the bodywork, great care as their acid is particularly For this reason, the car frequently rinsing the sponge. aggressive. must be washed in an area equipped for the collection and 4) Rinse well with water and dry Windows purification of the liquids used with a jet of air or a chamois leather. while washing. Use specific window cleaners to clean When drying the car, be careful to the windows. Use very clean cloths to get at those parts which are not so avoid scratching the glass or damag- easily seen e.g. the door frames, bon- ing its transparency. net and around the headlights where water can most readily collect. You IMPORTANT To prevent damage should leave the car out in the open to the electric heater element, wipe so that any water remaining can the inside of the heated rear window evaporate more easily. gently in the same direction as the el- ements.

232 INTERIORS CLEANING ALCANTARA SEATS CLEANING SUHARA SEATS Alcantara upholstery is easy to Follow procedure A or B according From time to time check that water clean. Follow the same instructions to the type of stain to remove (see has not collected under the mats provided for velvet upholstery. the table below). (from dripping shoes, umbrellas, etc.) which could cause the steel to CLEANING VELVET SEATS Type of stain Procedure rust. AND FABRICS Oil, grease B – Remove dust with a soft brush Never use inflammable and vacuum cleaner. Use a moist Chocolate A (lukewarm water) products like fuel oil brush to clean velvet upholstery. Coffee A (lukewarm water) ether or rectified petrol – Brush the seats with a damp for cleaning inside the car. The sponge with water and a neutral electrostatic discharges generat- Milk A (water and detergent) soap. ed when rubbing to clean may Wax B (using a palette knife) cause fire. Do not keep aerosol CLEANING LEATHER AND Fruit A (cold water) cans in the car. There is the risk IMITATION LEATHER SEATS Ballpoint pen A (water and detergent) they might explode. Aerosol cans – Remove the dry dirt with a must never be exposed to a tem- chamois leather or very slightly Mud A (water and ammonia) perature above 50°C; when the moist loth without exerting too Pencil B weather starts to get hot the tem- much pressure. perature inside the car might go well beyond that figure. – Remove liquid or grease stains Procedure A with a dry absorbent cloth without rubbing. Then wipe with a chamois Remove the stain using a cloth PLASTIC PARTS INSIDE leather or soft cloth moistened with moistened with water or with a solu- THE CAR water and neutral soap. If the stain tion of water and water-based deter- does not come out, use a special gent or ammonia (2 tablespoons per Use special products designed not cleaning compound being particu- litre of water) without rubbing. to alter the appearance of the com- larly careful to follow the instruc- ponents. Procedure B tions for use. Remove the stain using a white cloth IMPORTANT Do not use alcohol IMPORTANT Never use alcohol or moistened with undiluted or diluted or petrol to clean the instrument alcohol-based products. perchloro-ethylene without rubbing. panel. 233 LYBRA STATION WAGON

You will find all the information specific to REAR WINDOW WASHER/WIPER ...... 235 the Lybra SW that differs from that already INTERIOR LIGHTS ...... 236 given in previous sections of this handbook. SOUND SYSTEM ...... 236 REAR TRIM AUTOMATIC The Lybra SW is a car that, as well as sharing CONTROL SYSTEM ...... 237 all the features of safety, driving pleasure and BOOT ...... 238 environmental-friendliness with the Lybra saloon, offers you the extra possibility of having ROOF RACK/SKI RACK ...... 245 an extensive loading capacity permanently at TOWING THE CAR ...... 245 your disposal. IF A TYRE IS PUNCTURED ...... 246 IF A BULB BURNS OUT ...... 247

234 REAR WINDOW WASHER/WIPER SPRAY NOZZLES (fig. 3) If there is no jet of liquid, first make sure that there is liquid in the reser- OPERATION (fig. 1) The rear window wiper will be au- voir (see “Car maintenance”). tomatically operated for some seconds This device only works with the ig- The rear window washer jets can be when the windscreen wiper is work- nition key at MAR: directed by adjusting the inclination ing and reverse gear is engaged. of the nozzles A. To operate the rear window wiper, turn the ring A to '. The rear win- REPLACING THE BLADES dow wiper will flick. (fig. 2) Push stalk B forward to operate the Replace the entire rear window wi- rear window washer. It will be switched per blade and arm assembly. off when the stalk is released. 1) Lift the cover A and remove the The wiper will be operated auto- arm by loosening the nut B fastening matically for a few flicks when the it to the pin. rear window washer is operated. 2) Position the new arm correctly and fasten the nut. 3) Lower the cover. P4T0177 P4T0178 P4T0179

fig. 1 fig. 2 fig. 3 235 INTERIOR LIGHTS SOUND SYSTEM CD PLAYER - CD-ROM DRIVE FOR LANCIA ICS WITH CENTRAL REAR CEILING NAVIGATION SYSTEM (fig. 6-7) LIGHT (fig. 4) REAR SPEAKERS (fig. 5) (where fitted) The ceiling light will come on when The rear speakers A are housed in The CD player A and the CD-ROM the switch A is in position 0 and the the side boot shelves. drive B for the Lancia ICS with nav- tailgate is opened. igation system are housed in a com- The ceiling light will come on re- AERIAL partment on the left-hand side of the gardless of the doors and tailgate when The aerial is located on the car roof. boot under flap C. the switch is in central position 1. Pull handle D to remove the clipped The ceiling light will be off regard- Remember to remove the aerial from the roof before washing the car in an on flap. To refit, insert the lower part less of the doors and tailgate when the first and then clip the flap back. switch is moved to the left (position 2). automatic car wash to prevent dam- aging it. Compartment E for storing the CDs IMPORTANT Make sure that the can be found over the compartment. switch is not in position 1 when leav- ing the car. The ceiling light will go out automatically after approximately 15 minutes if the tailgate is left open with the switch in position 0. P4T0180 P4T0181 P4T0182

fig. 4 fig. 5 fig. 6 236 See “Sound system” in this hand- Pull handle C to remove the clipped REAR TRIM book for CD player instructions. on flap. See the booklet attached to this To refit, insert the lower part first AUTOMATIC Owner Handbook for instructions on and then clip the flap back. CONTROL SYSTEM the Lancia ICS with navigation sys- (where fitted) tem and the CD-ROM drive. The car is equipped with a rear sus- HI-FI AUDIO SYSTEM pension self-bearing hydraulic-pneu- (where fitted) matic system with built-in self-level- ling functions (thanks to an active de- Subwoofer (fig. 8-9) vice fitted in the shock absorber) and

P4T0225 dampening functions in the place of A 14 dm3 bass box B is located in a the traditional shock absorber system. compartment on the right-hand side of the boot under flap A. The trim is lowered when the car is loaded (passengers, boot) according to the stiffness of the spring system and the load. However, as soon as the car starts off, the system employs the movements induced by the road sur- fig. 8 face on the wheels to increase its sup- porting capacity and lift the body to a pre-defined trim regardless of the P4T0224 P4T0185 load conditions.

fig. 7 fig. 9 237 The self-levelling rear suspensions BOOT OPENING THE TAILGATE automatically keep the rear of the (fig. 10-11) car’s height – and consequently its When using the boot, Lift switch A or insert the key in trim – constant regardless of the load make sure the load you are in the boot. lock B at turn it to position 1 to open carrying does not exceed the tailgate. the maximum allowed weight (see the “Technical Specifications” The tailgate is locked by the central chapter). Also ensure the items in door locking system. the boot are arranged properly and Use handle C over the lock to open fastened with straps to the specific the tailgate. hooks to prevent them being thrown forwards and injuring pas- sengers should you brake sharply.

When using the boot, make sure the load you are carrying does not exceed the permitted weight (see “Techni- cal specifications”). The trans- ported load and its arrangement in the boot will however effect road

holding also if the trim is kept P4T0249 P4T0805 constant by the automatic system.

fig. 10 fig. 11 238 OPENING THE TAILGATE WITH CLOSING THE TAILGATE CEILING LIGHT (fig. 14) THE REMOTE CONTROL (fig. 13) Ceiling light B on the right-hand The tailgate can be opened from the Use a handle A to close the tailgate. side of the boot comes on when the outside by pressing D (fig. 12) on the tailgate is opened. The light goes out ignition key. either when the tailgate is closed or The tailgate can be opened also after a few minutes if the tailgate is when the central door locking system left open. In the latter case, close and and the electronic alarm (where fit- open the tailgate again to switch the ted) are on. light back on. In this case, the alarm system im- plements the following strategy: – volumetric protection off – anti-lift sensor off – boot sensor off. The surveillance functions will be re- stored when the tailgate is closed. P4T804 P4T0187 P4T0189

fig. 12 fig. 13 fig. 14 239 UTILITY COMPARTMENTS ODDMENT TRAY (fig. 16) LUGGAGE COVER (fig. 17-18-19) (fig. 15) The oddment tray A is behind the The semi-rigid luggage cover A can These compartments are located rear seat back. be rolled up and removed. on the right and left-hand sides of The tray can be tilted by means of To roll it up, remove the two rear the boot. Pull handle A to open the handle B to reach the boot from the pins B from their recesses C and re- clipped-on flap B and remove it. To passenger compartment. lease the Velcro strips D on the sides. refit, insert the lower part first and then clip the flap back. To remove the tray, tilt it and re- move the side pins from their recesses The left-hand compartment is set up C. To reposition the tray, insert the to house the CD player and the CD- side pin in recesses C and turn it for- ROM drive for the Lancia ICS with

wards. P4T0191 navigator system (where fitted). The subwoofer for cars with HI-FI sound system is housed in the right- In the event of an acci- hand compartment. dent or sudden braking, the objects placed on the tray can be thrown around the passenger compartment can cause injuries. fig. 17 P4T0183 P4T0190 P4T0192

fig. 15 fig. 16 fig. 18 240 To remove the cover, roll it up and PASSENGER COMPARTMENT pears. Lift the right-hand side of the remove the two front pins E. SEPARATION NET reel first and then the left-hand side. Remove the reel from the boot To refit the cover, insert the front (fig. 20-21-22-23) (where fitted) (fig. 23). pins then extend it and insert the rear The net for separating the passenger pins. compartment and the boot is con- To reposition the reel, insert the left- tained on a double reel A. The upper hand side first and then the right- and lower sections of the net can be hand side. Turn the knob backwards To not place heavy ob- opened separately. until it locks. jects on the cover: you could damage it. Hook the upper part of the separa- tion net to supports B.

Hook the lower part of the separa- P4T0726 tion net to hooks D. In the event of an acci- dent or sudden braking, The reel can be removed from the the objects placed on the boot after wrapping up the upper and cover can be thrown around the lower sections. To remove the reel, passenger compartment can cause turn the knob on the right-hand side injuries. forwards until the red triangle ap- fig. 21 P4T0193 P4T0194 P4T0196

fig. 19 fig. 20 fig. 22 241 ANCHORING THE LOAD REVERSIBLE FLOOR MAT SKI TUNNEL (fig. 26) (fig. 24-25) The floor mat can be reversed. Re- The tunnel can be used to transport The load can be secured with belts move it and turn it over with the long objects (e.g. skis). Introduce ob- attached to the specific rings in the washable side facing up when carry- jects into the tunnel from the boot. ing dirty loads. boot corners. 1) Lower the armrest A. The rings can also be used to fasten 2) Press handle B and lower flap C. the luggage net (optional, can be pur- chased at a Lancia Dealership). 3) Remove the cover (where fitted). Push flap C towards the boot to close it. It will lock automatically. P4T0198

Heavy loads which are not securely anchored could seriously injure pas- sengers in the event of an accident.

fig. 24 P4T0197 P4T0199 P4T0200

fig. 23 fig. 25 fig. 26 242 EXTENDING THE BOOT To partially extend the boot To totally extend the boot The split rear seat allows to partially (one third) (fig. 27) (fig. 29) or totally extend the boot (one third, Fold the left-hand seat only. You Fold both side of the seat to obtain two thirds, or totally). can sit two passengers in the rear seat maximum boot capacity. To make the most of the boot load- on the right-hand side. ing capacity, remove the luggage cover, the tilting oddment tray and To partially extend the boot the passenger compartment separa- (two thirds) (fig. 28) tion net (where fitted) as shown in the Fold the right-hand seat only. You specific paragraphs. can sit one passenger in the rear seat on the left-hand side. P4T0201 P4T0202 P4T0203

fig. 27 fig. 28 fig. 29 243 To extend the boot To return the seats to their IMPORTANT If there is a fairly heavy load in the boot and you are 1) Pull handle A (fig. 30) located in normal position: travelling at night, it is a good idea to the middle of each cushion and pull it 1) Move the seat belt sideways and check and adjust the height of the forwards in the direction of the arrow. bring the seat back to an upright po- dipped beam headlights (see “Head- 2) Remove the head restraints from sition. Check that it has caught prop- lights”). the rear seat (see "Head restraints") erly. and insert them in the housings on the 2) Tip the cushion back and make cushion (fig. 31). sure that the seat belt webbing is not 3) Lift the handle by the sides of the twisted in the hidden stretches be- seat backs to release the seats: tween the cushions and the seat back.

B (fig. 32) = right-hand seat 3) Refit the head restraints. P4T0205 C (fig. 33) = left-hand seat. 4) Refit the passenger compartment separation net (where fitted), the tilt- 4) Lift the seat belts sideways and ing oddment tray and the luggage tilt the seat back forwards as to ob- cover as shown in the specific para- tain a single load platform with the graphs. floor of the boot.

fig. 32 P4T0204 P4T0739 P4T0206

fig. 30 fig. 31 fig. 33 244 ROOF RACK/ Keep caps A which will be used to TOWING THE CAR cover the fastening points when the SKI RACK bars are removed. OR ANOTHER To refit caps A, insert tab C and VEHICLE FASTENERS (fig. 34) then press on the other side to fasten the caps in their housing. To fit the tow ring, remove the An optional set of two roof rack bumper cover A (fig. 35) by using a cross bars is available for the Lybra screwdriver as a lever in the specific SW. These bars can be used to secure After travelling a few recess. specific accessories for transporting kilometres, check that the objects (ski racks, windsurf racks, screws securing the rack IMPORTANT For other informa- etc.). are tight. tion, warning and precautions to be The car is equipped with three pairs adopted when towing the car or an- of securing points for the cross bars. other vehicle, see “In an emergency”. To fit the cross bars, remove the six Never exceed the permit- WARNING WHEN TOWING caps A using a screwdriver as a lever ted weight (refer to the TRAILERS in point B and fasten with the specific “Technical specifications” screws. chapter). Observe the speed limits that are specific to each country for vehicles towing trailers. The top speed, how- ever, is 100 kph. P4T0207 P4T0213

fig. 34 fig. 35 245 IF A TYRE IS PUNCTURED IMPORTANT For instructions on how to change a wheel correctly and for the warnings and the precautions SPARE WHEEL AND TOOLS Remove the shim B (fig. 37). to be adopted see “In an emergency”. The car may be equipped with a Release the locking device C (fig. 38). When you have finished, put the re- space-saver or normal sized spare Take the tool kit D and the spare wheel moved wheel, the jack and the tool kit wheel (where fitted). E and go to the wheel to be changed back in the boot and fasten then cor- rectly. Reposition the shim B (fig. 37). The spare wheel, the jack and the tool kit are in the boot in a compart- Before lowering the floor carpet, fas- ment under the floor carpet. ten the belt to the carpet as shown (fig. 39).

To reach the compartment, open the P4T0209 tailgate, lift the carpet from the floor If you removed the carpet from the and fasten its upper edge with the boot, reposition it by inserting the specific belt A (fig. 36). The floor car- front tabs F (fig. 40) in the respective pet can also be removed from the boot recesses on the floor. from the back.

fig. 37 P4T0208 P4T0210 P4T0211

fig. 36 fig. 38 fig. 39 246 IF A BULB BURNS OUT BOOT LIGHT (fig. 43) To replace a C , 12V-C10W bulb: IMPORTANT Read the warnings 2) Remove the bulb B (fig. 42) by 1) Remove the lens by using a and the precautions given in “In an releasing the side contacts and replace screwdriver as a lever on clip A. emergency”. it. 2) Remove bulb B by releasing the 3) Refit the ceiling light by inserting side contacts and replace it. CENTRAL REAR CEILING side C first and then pressing on the LIGHT 3) Refit the lens by inserting side C other side until it clips. first and then pressing on the other To replace a C, 12V-C10W bulb: side to engage clip A. 1) Remove the ceiling light by lever- ing in point A (fig. 41). P4T0214

fig. 41 P4T0212 P4T0215 P4T0216

fig. 40 fig. 42 fig. 43 247 ADDITIONAL BRAKE LIGHTS 6) Insert the bulb holder D (fig. 46) REAR LIGHT CLUSTER (THIRD BRAKE LIGHT) and turn it clockwise. Taillights, direction indicators, The light can be reached from the 7) Reposition the additional brake outside with the tailgate open. light on the tailgate and fasten screws brake lights, reversing light and B (fig. 45). rear fog light To replace a B, 12V-H21W bulb: 8) Fasten the caps A (fig. 44) in the To replace a bulb: 1) Remove the three covers A (fig. recesses on the screws. 44) using a screwdriver as a lever in 1) Remove flap A (fig. 47) from the the specific recesses. right-hand or left-hand utility com- partment in the boot, pull handle B 2) Loosen the screws B (fig. 45) and and remove the flap. remove the additional brake light C. P4T0218 3) Turn the bulb holder D (fig. 46) anticlockwise and remove it. 4) Press and turn bulb E (fig. 46) anticlockwise and remove it. 5) Fit the new bulb by pressing and turning it clockwise. fig. 45 P4T0217 P4T0219 P4T0183

fig. 44 fig. 46 fig. 47 248 2) Remove the light cluster by loos- F - Reversing light bulb (right-hand 6) Refit the light cluster and fasten ening the nuts C (fig. 48) with end A cluster only): B, 12V-P21W. the nuts C (fig. 48). (fig. 49) of the tool supplied with the Rear fog light bulb (left-hand clus- 7) Refit the utility compartment flap car and pull it outwards without dis- ter only): B, 21V-P21W. by inserting the lower part first and connecting the connector. Use end B then clipping it back. (fig. 49) of the tool in versions with G - Upper taillight bulb: B, 12V- HI-FI sound system to loosen the R10W. right-hand light cluster fastening H nuts. Fit the adapter C (fig. 49) pro- - Direction indicator bulb (or- vided. ange): B, 12V-PY21W. L 3) Loosen screw D (fig. 50) and re- - Brake light bulb: B, 12V-P21W. move the bulb holder E. 5) Refit the bulb holder E (fig. 50) P4T0221 D (fig. 50) 4) Remove the bulb by pressing it and fasten it with screw . slightly and turning it anticlockwise. Replace it (fig. 51).

fig. 50 P4T0220 P4T0301 P4T0222

fig. 48 fig. 49 fig. 51 249 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Motor and engineering enthusiasts as well as IDENTIFICATION DATA ...... 251 those “in the trade” will probably start reading ENGINE CODES - BODYWORK VERSIONS .. 253 from this point in the handbook. This, in fact, is ENGINE ...... 254 where a section jam-packed with facts, figures, TRANSMISSION ...... 258 formulae, measurements and tables begins. In a BRAKES...... 260 sense, it is the Lybra’s identity card. A document SUSPENSIONS...... 261 that introduces the car and explains in technical STEERING...... 261 jargon all the features that go together to make it a model designed to give you superlative driving WHEEL GEOMETRY ...... 261 satisfaction. WHEELS ...... 262 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM...... 265 DIMENSIONS...... 266 PERFORMANCE...... 268 WEIGHTS ...... 269 CAPACITIES ...... 271 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS...... 274 FUEL CONSUMPTION ...... 276

CO2 EMISSIONS IN EXHAUST ...... 277 TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE...... 278

250 IDENTIFICATION ENGINE MARKING MODEL PLATE The marking is stamped on the The plate (fig. 2) is fastened to the DATA cylinder block and includes the model front crossmember in the engine com- and the chassis number. partment and bears the following CHASSIS MARKING (A - fig. 1) identification information (fig. 3): It is printed on the upper right-hand A - Manufacturer’s name shock absorber attachment. B - Homologation number It can be reached by opening the C - Car model code bonnet and includes the following data: D - Chassis number – Car model E - Maximum vehicle weight fully loaded. – Chassis number. F - Maximum vehicle weight fully loaded with trailer. P4T0223 P4T0184

fig. 1 fig. 2 251 G - Maximum vehicle weight on BODYWORK PAINT front axle IDENTIFICATION PLATE H - Maximum vehicle weight on rear The plate (fig. 4) is applied on the axle inner boot/tailgate panel. I - Engine type It bears the following data: L - Body version code A - Paint manufacturer M - Spare part code B - Colour name N - Smoke opacity index (for diesel C - Lancia colour code engines). D - Re-spray and touch up code. P4T0250 P4T0137

fig. 3 fig. 4 252 ENGINE CODES - BODYWORK VERSIONS

Engine code Bodywork code Saloon Station Wagon Saloon Station Wagon 1.6 182B6000 182B6000 839AXF1A 12C 839BXF1A 13C

1.8 839A7000 839A7000 839AXG1A 14D 839BXG1A 15D

2.0 185A8000 185A8000 839AXH1A 16C 839BXH1A 17C

1.9 jtd 937A2000 937A2000 839AXN1A 22C 839BXN1A 23C

2.4 jtd 841C000 841C000 839AXP1A 24C 839BXP1A 25C

EURO 3 + D4 APPROVAL (for specific markets)

Engine code Bodywork code Saloon Station Wagon 1.8 839A7000 839AXG1A 14E 839BXG1A 15E

253 ENGINE

1.6 1.8 2.0 GENERAL FEATURES Engine code 182B6000 839A7000 185A8000 Cycle Otto Otto Otto Number and layout of cylinders 4 in line 4 in line 5 in line Number of valves per cylinder 4 4 4 Diameter x stroke mm 20.5 x 78.4 82 x 82.7 82 x 75.65 Total capacity cm3 1596 1747 1998 Compression ratio 10.5 : 1 10.3 : 1 10.7 : 1 Maximum power (EEC): kW 76 96 110 HP 103 130 150 corresponding ratio rpm 5750 6300 6500 Maximum torque (EEC): Nm 140 156 181 kgm 14.9 15.8 18.5 corresponding ratio rpm 4000 3800 3750 TIMING Intake: opens BTDC 0° – – opens ATDC – 3° 9° closes BTDC – – – closes ABDC 34° 41° 49° Exhaust: opens ATDC – – – opens BBDC 24° 32° 40° opens BTDC – – 0° closes ATDC 0° 2° – Tappet clearance for timing check: intake mm 0.45 0.45 0.45 exhaust mm 0.45 0.45 0.45 Cold tappet clearance: intake mm Hydraulic Hydraulic Hydraulic exhaust mm tappets tappets tappets

254 1.9 jtd 2.4 jtd GENERAL FEATURES Engine code 937A2000 841C000 Cycle Diesel Diesel Number and layout of cylinders 4 in line 5 in line Number of valves per cylinder 2 2 Diameter x stroke mm 82 x 90.4 82 x 90.4 Total capacity cm3 1910 2387 Compression ratio 18.5 : 1 18.45 : 1 Maximum power (EEC): kW 85 110 HP 115 150 corresponding ratio rpm 4000 4000 Maximum torque (EEC): Nm 275 305 kgm 28 31,1 corresponding ratio rpm 2000 1800 TIMING Intake: opens BTDC 0° 0° opens ATDC – – closes BTDC – – closes ABDC 32° 32° Exhaust: opens ATDC – – opens BBDC 40° 40° closes BTDC 2° 2° closes BTDC – – Tappet clearance for timing check: intake mm 0.50 0.50 exhaust mm 0.50 0.50 Cold tappet clearance: intake mm 0.30 0.30 exhaust mm 0.35 0.35

255 FUEL FEED/IGNITION – Injection pressure: 3 bar. – Type: Multipoint, phased, sequen- tial. – Stoichiometric air-to-fuel metering Modifications or repairs of the basis of electronic processing of – Air cleaner: dry, with paper filter. to the fuel feed system that the data provided by the engine rpm – Petrol pump: electrical, submerged are not carried out prop- and absolute pressure in intake mani- in tank. erly or do not take the system’s fold sensors. technical specifications into ac- – Petrol filter in tank; count can cause malfunctions – “Closed loop” information on con- leading to the risk of fire. sumption for petrol metering provided – Injection pressure: 3 bar. by the lambda sensor. – Metering of intake air directly – Firing order: 1 - 3 - 4 - 2. measured by means of a hot film flow meter. 1.6 version – Spark plugs: Integrated electronic injection and LANCIA RC10YCC – “Closed loop” information on con- ignition system. A single control unit LANCIA BKR5EZ sumption for petrol metering provided governs both function and processes Champion RC10YCC by the lambda sensor. NGK BKR5EZ injection time (for fuel metering) and – Engine idling speed: 825 ± 50 spark advance angle by means of a rpm. knock sensor. 1.8 version – Phase variator on intake camshaft. – Type: Multipoint, phased, sequen- Integrated electronic injection and tial. ignition system. A single control unit – Firing order: 1 - 3 - 4 - 2. governs both function and processes – Spark plugs: – Air cleaner: dry, with paper filter. injection time (for fuel metering) and LANCIA RC10YCC spark advance angle. – Petrol pump: electrical, submerged LANCIA BKR6EZ in tank. Champion RC10YCC – Petrol filter in tank. NGK BKR6EZ

256 2.0 versions – Engine idling speed: 700 ± 50 rpm. FUEL FEED Integrated electronic injection and – Firing order: 1 - 2 - 4 - 5 - 3. ignition system. A single control unit 1.9 jtd - 2.4 jtd versions – Spark plugs: governs both function and processes LANCIA RC8BYC injection time (for fuel metering) and Modifications or repairs Champion RC8BYC spark advance angle. to the fuel feed system that are not carried out prop- – Type: Multipoint, phased, sequen- erly or do not take the system’s tial. technical specifications into ac- – Air cleaner: dry, with paper filter. count can cause malfunctions leading to the risk of fire. – Petrol pump: electrical, submerged in tank. – Petrol filter in tank. – Injection pressure: 3 bar. Direct high pressure injection system with overboost and intercooler. Stoichiometric air-to-fuel metering of the basis of: Fuel pump: high pressure, unijet; electrical pre-feed pump in tank. – Preventive metering of intake air directly measured by means of a hot – Firing order: film flow meter; 1.9 jtd: 1 - 3 - 4 - 2 2.4 jtd: 1 - 2 - 4 - 5 - 3. – “Closed loop” information on con- sumption provided by the lambda – Air cleaner: dry, with paper filter. sensor.

257 – Variable geometry turbocharger LUBRICATION TRANSMISSION operated by exhaust gas with waste- Forced lubrication by means of gate excess pressure valve. geared pump with built-in pressure CLUTCH – Supercharging pressure: 1 bar. limiting valve. Hydraulically controlled, self-ad- – Electronically controlled cooled Total capacity cartridge filter for oil justing pedal without idle stroke. EGR system according to engine rpm, purification. load and temperature. MECHANICAL GEARBOX AND COOLING DIFFERENTIAL Cooling system with radiator, cen- trifuge pump and expansion reservoir. Five gears forward and reserve with synchromesh for forward gear en- “Controlled by-pass” thermostat on gagement. secondary circuit for recirculating coolant from the engine to the radia- Reverse with synchromesh (1.9 jtd tor. and 2.4 jtd versions). Electrical fan for cooling the radia- tor controlled by the engine control unit.

258 The gearbox ratios are:

Saloon 1.6 1.8 2.0 1.9 jtd 2.4 jtd

1st gear 3.909 3.909 3.909 3.800 3.800

2nd gear 2.238 2.238 2.238 2.235 2.235

3rd gear 1.520 1.520 1.520 1.360 1.360

4th gear 1.156 1.156 1.156 0.971 0.971

5th gear 0.971 0.971 0.946 0.707 0.763 reverse 3.909 3.909 3.909 3.545 3.545

Station Wagon 1.6 1.8 2.0 1.9 jtd 2.4 jtd

1st gear 3.909 3.909 3.909 3.800 3.800

2nd gear 2.238 2.238 2.238 2.235 2.235

3rd gear 1.520 1.520 1.520 1.360 1.360

4th gear 1.156 1.156 1.156 0.971 0.971

5th gear 0.971 0.971 0.946 0.707 0.763 reverse 3.909 3.909 3.909 3.545 3.545

259 DIFFERENTIAL Drive transmission to the front BRAKES wheels by means of drive shafts con- Final drive gear and differential as- nected to the differential and to the sembly built into the gearbox. wheels with CV joints. SERVICE AND EMERGENCY BRAKES Front: disc brakes with floating shoes and one cylinder per wheel. Rear: disc brakes with floating shoe Crossed hydraulic circuit control. 8" vacuum brake booster with addi- The differential ratios are: tional chamber (1.6 - 1.8 and 1.9 jtd versions). 7" + 8" double tandem Final reduction Number vacuum brake booster (2.0 and 2.4 differential torque of teeth jtd versions).

1.6 3,823 65/17 Four sensor, four channel ABS. Automatic take-up of friction liner 1.8 3,733 56/15 wear. Brake force distributor governed by 2.0 3,733 56/15 the ABS system.

1.9 jtd 3,353 57/17 HANDBRAKE Controlled by a lever, it works me- 2.4 jtd 3,111 56/18 chanically on the rear brakes.

260 SUSPENSIONS STEERING WHEEL

Telescopic, energy absorbing jointed GEOMETRY FRONT steering column with angular adjust- Toe-in measured from rim to rim: Independent wheel, McPherson with ment system. transverse lower wishbones. Permanently lubricated rack and – front wheels: –1 ± 1 mm. Offset coil springs and dual effect pinion. – rear wheels: 2 ± 2 mm. telescopic shock absorbers. Hydraulic power steering. The values refer to the car in run- Anti-roll bar. Permanently lubricated joints. ning order. Minimum steering circle: This operation requires the use of REAR special equipment and must therefore Independent wheel, BLG (guided – 1.6 - 1.8 - 1.9 jtd versions = 10.5 m be carried out at a Lancia Dealer- wishbone) multiple wishbone layout. – 2.0 - 2.4 jtd versions = 10.9 m. ship. Coil springs. Number of steering wheel turns Dual effect, telescopic, pressurised lock-to-lock: approximately 2.5. gas shock absorbers and stabiliser.

261 WHEELS The homologated tyres are listed in To ensure safety of the car in move- the log book. ment, it must be fitted with tyres of specified size and of the same make IMPORTANT In the event of dis- RIMS AND TYRES and type on all wheels. crepancies between information given Printed steel or alloy rims (where fit- in the Owner Handbook and that IMPORTANT Do not use inner ted). shown in the Log Book, refer to the tubes with tubeless tyres. SPACE- latter only. SAVER SPARE WHEEL Tubeless tyres with radial carcass.

Rim Tyre Printed steel rim. 6J x 15H2 195/65 R15 91H Tubeless tyre.

1.6 - 1.9 jtd 1 6 /2J x 15H2 - 37 (v) 205/60 R15 91V (■) 6J x 15H2 - 37 (■) Rim Tyre 1.8 6J x 15H2 195/65 R15 91V 1 6 /2J x 15H2 - 37 (v) 205/60 R15 91V (■) 4.00B x 15” H35 T125/80 R15 96M 6J x 15H2 - 37 (■)

2.0 - 2.4 jtd 6J x 15H2 195/65 R15 91V 1 6 /2J x 15H2 - 37 (v) 205/60 R15 91V (■) SNOW CHAINS 6J x 15H2 - 37 (■)

1 Use only low profile chains with 6 /2J x 16H2 - 37 205/55 R16 91V maximum height off the tyre of 9 mm. (v) For some versions (■) Optional Check the tautness of the chains af- ter driving some ten metres. SNOW TYRES Rim Tyre

1.6 - 1.9 jtd 6J x 15H2 195/65 R15 91T (M + S)

1.8 - 2.0 - 2.4 jtd 6J x 15H2 195/65 R15 91H (M + S)

262 CORRECT TYRE READING Load index (capacity) Maximum speed index Below, please find the instructions Q = up to 160 km/h. 60 84 needed to understand the meaning of = 250 kg = 500 kg R = up to 170 km/h the code stamped on the tyre. 61 = 257 kg 85 = 515 kg 62 86 S = up to 180 km/h. The code may be in one of the ways = 265 kg = 530 kg given in the example. 63 = 272 kg 87 = 545 kg T = up to 190 km/h. 64 = 280 kg 88 = 560 kg U = up to 200 km/h. 65 = 290 kg 89 = 580 kg H = up to 210 km/h. 66 = 300 kg 90 = 600 kg Example: 67 = 307 kg 91 = 615 kg V = over 210 km/h. 205/55 R 16 91 V 68 = 315 kg 92 = 630 kg ZR = over 240 km/h. 69 = 325 kg 93 = 650 kg W = up to 270 km/h. 205 = Nominal width (distance in 70 = 335 kg 94 = 670 kg mm between sides). Y = up to 300 km/h. 71 = 345 kg 95 = 690 kg 55 = Percentage height/width ra- 72 = 355 kg 96 = 710 kg tio. Maximum speed index 73 = 365 kg 97 = 730 kg for snow tyres R = Radial tyre. 74 = 375 kg 98 = 750 kg Q M + S = up to 160 km/h. ZR = Radial tyre, with speed over 75 = 387 kg 99 = 775 kg 240 km/h. T M + S = up to 190 km/h. 76 = 400 kg 100 = 800 kg H M + S = up to 210 km/h. 16 = Rim diameter in inches. 77 = 412 kg 101 = 825 kg 91 = Load index (capacity), e.g. 78 = 425 kg 102 = 850 kg 91 = 615 kg. Not present in ZR 79 = 437 kg 103 = 875 kg tyres. 80 = 450 kg 104 = 900 kg W, Z = Maximum speed index. In ZR 81 = 462 kg 105 = 925 kg tyres the speed index Z is be- 82 = 475 kg 106 = 950 kg fore the R. 83 = 487 kg

263 UNDERSTANDING Example: RIM MARKING (fig. 5) 6 1/2 J x 15 H2 The following are the necessary in- dications to understand the meaning 6 1/2 = rim width in inches (1). of the markings on the rim. J = rim drop centre outline (side projection where the tyre bead rests (2). 15 = rim nominal diameter in inches (corresponds to diam- eter of the tyre to be mounted (3 = ∅). H2 = “hump” shape and number (relief on the circumference holding the tubeless tyre ead on te rim). P4T0800

fig. 5 264 ELECTRICAL BATTERY Earthed negative. SYSTEM Batteries with higher electrical specifications are fitted in specific markets. 20 hour discharge Cold cranking Modifications or repairs capacity discarge current (–18°C) to the system that are not 1.6 50Ah - 60Ah (*) 250A - 380A (*) carried out properly or do not take the system’s technical 1.8 - 2.0 50Ah - 60Ah (*) 250A - 380A (*) specifications into account can 1.9 jtd 60Ah - 70Ah (*) 380A - 450A (*) cause malfunctions leading to the 2.4 jtd 70Ah 450A risk of fire. (*) Alternative for versions/markets where applicable ALTERNATOR Diode rectifier with built-in electronic voltage regulator. The battery starts recharging as soon as the engine starts Voltage: 12 Volts. Maximum nominal output current 1.6 80A - (80A or 90A with air conditioner) (105A alternative for versions/markets where applicable) 1.8 - 2.0 100A - (100A with air conditioner) (120A alternative for versions/markets where applicable) 1.9 jtd 85A or 100A (100A or 120A with air conditioner) (120A with supplementary heater) 2.4 jtd 120A

STARTER MOTOR Output power 1.6 1.3 kW or 1.4 kW 1.8 - 2.0 1.1 kW 1.9 jtd 1.8 kW or 2.0 kW 2.4 jtd 2.1 kW

265 DIMENSIONS

Height is intended for an unladen car. Dimensions in mm. Boot volume (as per VDA standards): 420 dm3

P4T0027 fig. 6 266 Height is intended for an unladen car. Dimensions in mm. Boot volume under luggage cover (as per VDA standards): – normal conditions: 420 dm3 – extended: 800 dm3 Overall volume: 1,300 dm3

P4T0028 fig. 7 (•) Height including roof bars: 1578 mm 267 PERFORMANCE Top admitted speed after running-in (in km/h)

Saloon 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th R

1.6 48 84 123 161 185 48

1.8 54 94 137 180 201 54

2.0 55 96 141 186 210 35

1.9 jtd 36 62 102 143 190 39

2.4 jtd 39 65 108 151 214 41

Station Wagon 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th R

1.6 48 84 123 161 185 48

1.8 54 94 137 180 201 54

2.0 55 96 141 186 210 55

1.9 jtd 36 62 102 143 190 39

2.4 jtd 39 65 108 151 214 41

268 WEIGHTS (kg)

1.6 1.6 1.8 1.8 2.0 2.0 Saloon Station Wagon Saloon Station Wagon Saloon Station Wagon

Kerb weight (including fuel, spare wheel, tools and accessories): 1,250 1,290 1,300 1,340 1,350 1,390

Payload (*) including driver: 520 525 520 525 520 525 Maximum admitted loads (**) – front axle: 1,050 1,050 1,050 1,050 1,050 1,050 – rear axle: 1,050 1,050 1,050 1,050 1,050 1,050 – total: 1,770 1,815 1,820 1,865 1,870 1,915 Towable loads: – trailer with brakes 1,200 1,200 1,400 1,400 1,400 1,400 – trailer without brakes 400 400 400 400 400 400 Maximum load on roof: 50 80 50 80 50 80 Maximum load on tow hitch (trailer with brakes): 75 75 75 75 75 75 (*) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc,), the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload. (**) Loads not to be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging the loads so that they comply with these limits.

269 1.9 jtd 1.9 jtd 2.4 jtd 2.4 jtd Saloon Station Wagon Saloon Station Wagon

Kerb weight (including fuel, spare wheel, tools and accessories): 1,310 1,350 1,370 1,410 Payload (*) including driver: 520 525 520 525 Maximum admitted loads – front axle: 1,050 1,050 1,050 1,050 – rear axle: 1,050 1,050 1,050 1,050 – total: 1,830 1,875 1,890 1,935 Towable loads: – trailer with brakes 1,400 1,400 1,400 1,400 – trailer without brakes 400 400 400 400 Maximum load on roof: 50 80 50 80 Maximum load on tow hitch (trailer with brakes): 75 75 75 75

(*) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.), the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload.

(**) Loads not to be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging the loads so that they comply with these limits.

270 CAPACITIES

1.6 1.8 2.0 Prescribed fuel Recommended products litres kg litres kg litres kg

Fuel tank: 60 – 60 – 60 – Premium unleaded petrol with including a reserve of: 8–8– 8–a RON not lower than 95

Engine cooling system: 8.0 – 6.80 – 8.6 – Mixture of distilled water and PARAFLU UP at 50%. ❒ Engine sump: 3.5 3.1 3.9 3.5 4.3 3.8 SELENIA 20K ( ) Engine sump and filter: 3.8 3.4 4.3 3.85 5.0 4.45

Gearbox/differential: 1.98 1.8 1.98 1.8 1.98 1.8 TUTELA CAR MATRYX Hydraulic power steering: 0.9 – 0.9 – 0.9 – TUTELA GI/A

CV cavities and joints (each): – 0.095 – 0.095 – 0.095 TUTELA MRM 2 Hydraulic brake circuit with ABS: 0.52 – 0.56 – 0.56 – TUTELA TOP 4 Windscreen/rear window 4–4–4–TUTELA PROFESSIONAL washer reservoir (SW): SC 35

Windscreen/rear window/ 5.5 – 5.5 – 5.5 – TUTELA PROFESSIONAL headlight washer reservoir (SW) SC 35 (❒) For temperatures lower than –20°C, we recommend SELENIA PERFORMER SAE 5W-30.

271 1.9 jtd 2.4 jtd Prescribed fuel litres kg litres kg Recommended products

Fuel tank: 60 – 60 – Diesel fuel for motor vehicles including a reserve of: 8– 8–(EN590 specifications)

Engine cooling system: 7.27 – 7.4 – Mixture of distilled water and PARAFLU UP at 50%.

Engine sump: 4.2 3.75 4.8 4.3 SELENIA TURBO DIESEL (❍) Engine sump and filter: 4.8 4.25 5.5 4.9

Gearbox/differential: 1.98 1.8 1.98 1.8 TUTELA CAR MATRYX

Hydraulic power steering: 0.9 – 0.9 – TUTELA GI/A

CV cavities and joints (each): – 0.095 – 0.095 TUTELA MRM 2 Hydraulic brake circuit TUTELA TOP 4 with ABS: 0.56 – 0.56 –

Windscreen/rear window TUTELA PROFESSIONAL washer reservoir (SW): 4– 4–SC 35 Windscreen/rear window/ TUTELA PROFESSIONAL headlight washer reservoir (SW): 5.5 – 5.5 – SC 35 (❍) For temperatures lower than –15°C, we recommend SELENIA WR DIESEL SAE 5W-40.

272 NOTES ON FLUID USE Windscreen washer fluid ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION Use a mixture of water and TUTELA During the beginning of the car’s life Oil PROFESSIONAL SC 35 fluid in the the engine is be tuned in. Engine oil Do not add oil with different speci- following concentrations: consumption can only be considered stabilised after the first 5,000 - 6,000 fications from the oil already in the 30% of TUTELA PROFESSIONAL km. engine. SC 35 and 70% of water in summer. IMPORTANT Oil consumption de- 50% of TUTELA PROFESSIONAL Engine coolant pends on the driving style and the SC 35 and 50% of water in winter. A 50-50 mixture of PARAFLU UP conditions of use. and distilled water gives freeze pro- If the temperature falls below –20°C, tection to -35°C. use TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35 undiluted.

273 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

PRODUCTS WHICH MAY BE USED AND THEIR SPECIFICATIONS

Use Fluid and lubricant specifications Recommended Applications for correct vehicle operation fluids and lubricants P4T0631

SAE 10W40 synthetic-based multigrade oil exceeding SELENIA 20K ACEA A3 - 96, CCMC G5 and API SJ specifications

Lubricants for petrol engines (❒) SELENIA SAE 5W-30 synthetic-based multigrade oil exceeding PERFORMER ACEA A1 and API SJ specifications MULTIPOWER

Lubricants SAE 5W-40 synthetic-based multigrade oil exceeding SELENIA for diesel engines ACEA B3and API CF specifications WR DIESEL

(❒) For temperatures lower than –20°C, we recommend SELENIA PERFORMER MULTIPOWER SAE 5W-30.

274 Use Fluid and lubricant specifications Recommended Applications for correct vehicle operation fluids and lubricants

SAE 75W85 synthetic-based lubricant exceeding API GL-4, TUTELA Mechanical gearbox MIL-L-2105 D specifications CAR MATRYX and differential Drive lubricants and greas Molybdenum disulphide, lithium soap based grease, water re- TUTELA MRM 2 CV joints sistant, NLGI = 2 consistency

Brake fluid Synthetic fluid, NTHSA no. 116 DOT 4, ISO 4925, TUTELA TOP 4 Hydraulic brake and SAE J-1703, CUNA NC 956-01 clutch controls

Radiator antifreeze Protective, red colour, with antifreeze action, ethylene glycol PARAFLU UP (●) Proportions: and organic inhibitor based 50% water and 50% PARAFLU UP

Diesel fuel additive Diesel fuel additive providing engine protection DIESEL MIX To be mixed with diesel fuel (25 cc for 10 l)

Windscreen/rear Mixture of alcohol and surfactants CUNA NC 956-II TUTELA To be used diluted window/headlight PROFESSIONAL or undiluted washer fluid SC 35 (●) IMPORTANT Do not top up or mix with other fluids with specifications different from the prescribed ones.

275 FUEL CONSUMPTION IMPORTANT Road and traffic conditions, weather, general con- The fuel consumption values shown – an extra-urban cycle: consisting ditions of the vehicle, driving style, in the following table were defined ac- in frequent accelerations, in all gears, fittings and accessories, use of the cording to the type-approval specifi- simulating normal conditions of use. climate control system, load, roof cations in European Directives. Speed ranges from 0 to 120 km/h; racks and other situations penal- ising aerodynamic penetration and Consumption values are defined by – combined consumption consist- effecting rolling resistance will in- means of the following procedures: ing of 37% urban cycle and 63% ex- fluence fuel consumption rates tra-urban cycle. – an urban cycle: consisting of a which can be different from the cold start and a simulated drive in values shown in the table (see city streets; “Cheap running that respects the environment” in “Driving your car” chapter).

CONSUMPTION ACCORDING TO DIRECTIVE 1999/100/EC (liter x 100 km)

Urban Extra-urban Average combined Saloon Station Wagon Saloon Station Wagon Saloon Station Wagon

1.6 11.2 11.4 6.4 6.5 8.2 8.3

1.8 11.8 12.4 6.3 6.5 8.3 8.7

2.0 13.8 14.0 7.5 7.7 9.8 10.0

1.9 jtd 8.1 8.4 4.7 4.8 5.9 6.1

2.4 jtd 8.9 9.1 5.3 5.4 6.6 6.8

276 CO2 EMISSION IN EXHAUST

The CO2 emission in exhaust shown in the following tables refers to the combined consumption.

CO2 EMISSIONS AS PER DIRECTIVE 1999/100/EC (g/km)

1.6 1.8 2.0 1.9 jtd 2.4 jtd Saloon Station Saloon Station Saloon Station Saloon Station Saloon Station Wagon Wagon Wagon Wagon Wagon

194 197 198 206 233 238 157 162 176 179

277 TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE

COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar) Saloon Type Average load Full load Space-saver Front Rear Front Rear spare wheel 1.6 195/65 R15 91H 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 4.2 205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 4.2 1.8 195/65 R15 91V 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 4.2 205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 4.2

2.0 195/65 R15 91V 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 4.2 205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 4.2 205/55 R16 91V 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.5 4.2 1.9 jtd 195/65 R15 91H 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 4.2 205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 4.2 2.4 jtd 195/65 R15 91V 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 4.2 205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 4.2 205/55 R16 91V 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.5 4.2

(■) Optional 0.3 bar should be added to the values given if the pressure is measured while the tyre is hot.

278 Station Wagon Tyre Average load Full load Space-saver Front Rear Front Rear spare wheel 1.6 195/65 R15 91H 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2 205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2 1.8 195/65 R15 91V 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2 205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2

2.0 195/65 R15 91V 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2 205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2 205/55 R16 91V 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.5 (2.8*) 4.2 1.9 jtd 195/65 R15 91H 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2 205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2 2.4 jtd 195/65 R15 91V 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2 205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2 205/55 R16 91V 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.5 (2.8*) 4.2

(■) Optional 0.3 bar should be added to the values given if the pressure is measured while the tyre is hot. (*) Maximum load in boot with seats folded + 1 person + 350 kg.

279 kACCESSORY INSTALLATION

Genuine LANCIA accessories have been The following pages show diagrams and give designed with the Lybra specifically in mind instructions for correctly fitting a number of and have been selected and tested on the car. accessories. Installation must always be en- They are easy to use, reliable and practical, trusted to the experts. qualities that lead to enhanced comfort and LANCIA has specially trained its Dealership safety under all driving conditions. staff for work on the Lybra. If you wish to give your Lybra a sportier look, LANCIA has designed light alloy rims, leather panels, spoilers and sporty bumpers that are TOW HITCH...... 281 fully in keeping with the car’s line making it more personal and aggressive. To ensure child safety, the child safety seats offered by Lineaccessori LANCIA meet the requirements of the European standards cur- rently in force. You can find the LANCIA accessories described in a catalogue available from Lancia Dealerships. Just ask the staff to give you all the details.

280 TOW HITCH Use a tow hitch suited for the max- The electrical brake (where relevant) imum towable load of the car version or other device (electrical winch, etc.) on which the tow hitch is to be fitted. must be powered directly from the battery by means of a lead with a Use a unified coupling for the elec- TOW HITCH INSTALLATION cross-section area no smaller than 2.5 trical connections. The coupling is mm2. The tow hitch must be fixed to the generally fitted on a specific mount body by an expert in accordance with fastened to the tow hitch. In addition to the electrical connec- the following instructions and re- tions, only the power wire for an ad- For the electric connection, a 7 or 13 specting the additional and/or inte- ditional electrical brake and for inter- pole 12VDC coupling must be used grative information provided by the nal trailer lighting with a power not (CUNA/UNI and ISO/DIN standards). tow hitch manufacturer. exceeding 15W can be connected to Follow the instructions provided by the car’s electrical system. The tow hitch to be fitted must com- the manufacturer of the car and/or ply with the current regulations in the tow hitch. force, with reference to Directive 94/20/EEC and subsequent modifi- cations.

281 INSTALLATION DIAGRAM A-A cross-section P4T0633 Fasten the tow hitch (fig. 1) in the (313) 1 points marked with a Ø symbol using 3

80 Rear wheel axlei a total of: 2 2

– six M8x30 screws 3 20 (of which five hexagonal head screws and one countersunk Allen screw) 496,5 496,5 98 442,5 M10 Existing hole

– three M12x35 screws M10 4 M8 ° N

– two M8x30 screws 2 M8 ° 3 M12 1015 N ° 4 Existing nuts (existing on the car) N 242 100 A 87 – two M10x110 screws 70 35 (countersunk Allen screw). 107,5 100 87,5 25,5 Reinforcement plate 1 must be at 26,5 least 8 mm thick. Reinforcement 313 10 plates 2 and 3 must be at least 6 mm 65 ≥ thick. Standard ball hitch A 385 ± 35 Load

fig. 1

IMPORTANT Fasten a tag in a After assembly, seal the clearly visible position at the same holes to prevent exhaust height as the tow hitch. This tag is fumes from entering the compulsory. It must be adequately passenger compartment. sized, made of suitable material and carry the following information: MAX LOAD ON BALL COUPLING 75 kg 282 INDEX – specifications ...... 265 – service and emergency ...... 260 Bodywork Bulbs (replacement) ...... 185 ABS ...... 148 – maintenance ...... 231 – bulb types ...... 162-186-187 Accessories purchased – versions ...... 253 – general ...... 186 by the user ...... 174 Bonnet ...... 141 Accessory installation ...... 280 Boot ...... 266-267 Capacities ...... 271-272 Aerial (SW - sound system) .... 236 – anchoring the load .... 140-243 Car maintenance ...... 209 Air cleaner ...... 221 – ceiling light ...... 239 – additional checks ...... 213 Air vents (adjustable) ...... 104 – extending (saloon) ...... 139 – annual inspection schedule 213 Airbags (front and side) ...... 43 – extending (SW) ...... 243 – scheduled servicing ...... 210 Alternator ...... 265 – opening and closing... 138-238 – service schedule ...... 211 Armrest (front with oddment Boot light (saloon) Card pocket ...... 128 compartment) ...... 130 – replacing a bulb ...... 195 Ceiling lights (front and rear) Armrests (front and rear) ...... 31 Boot light (SW) – controls ...... 125 Ashtray ...... 127 – replacing a bulb ...... 247 – replacing a bulb ...... 193-194 Brake and clutch fluid level..... 220 Battery Brake light Cellular phone set-up ...... 144 – electrolyte level ...... 223 – replacing a bulb (saloon)... 191 Central rear ceiling – level gauge ...... 223 – replacing a bulb (SW) ...... 248 light (SW) ...... 236 – maintenance ...... 223 Brakes – replacing a bulb ...... 247 – recharging ...... 205 – fluid level ...... 220 Centralised door lock ...... 134

283 – centralised window – general ...... 168 – replacing a rear system ...... 136 Controls ...... 118 bulb (SW) ...... 248 Chassis number ...... 251 Cooling ...... 103 – replacing a side bulb ...... 190 Cheap running that respects Courtesy lights ...... 124 Door lights the environment ...... 168 Cruise Control ...... 122 – replacing a bulb ...... 193 Check Control ...... 58 Doors – warning lights ...... 61 Dashboard ...... 15 Checking fluid levels ...... 215 Diesel filter – ceiling lights ...... 135 Child lock ...... 38 – draining the condense ...... 222 – centralised locking system 134 Children Differential – centralised window system 134 (transporting in safety) ...... 38 – specifications ...... 258 – child lock ...... 135 Dimensions ...... 266-267 Cigar lighter ...... 127 Driving your car ...... 156 Climate control system ...... 105 Dipped beam headlights – maintenance ...... 230 – controls ...... 116 Electrical socket ...... 131 Clutch (specifications) ...... 252 – replacing a bulb ...... 188 Electrical system CO2 emission in exhaust ...... 277 – slant compensation ...... 146 (specifications) ...... 265 Coin tray ...... 128 Direction indicators Electronic alarm ...... 21 Containing running costs – controls ...... 116 and pollution ...... 168 – replacing a front bulb ...... 189 – ministerial – conditions of use ...... 169 – replacing a rear bulb homologation ...... 27-290 – driving style ...... 169 (saloon) ...... 191 – remote control ...... 22

284 – replacing the remote EOBD system ...... 147 – capacity ...... 271-272 control batteries ...... 26 ESP system ...... 149 Fuses ...... 196 – switching the alarm off ..... 25 Electronic control units ...... 225 Flashing the headlights 116 Gas discharge Engine Fog Sensor ...... 113 headlights...... 146 – cooling ...... 258 Front foglights Gearbox – engine marking ...... 251 – controls ...... 119 – transmission ratio ...... 258 – fuel feed ...... 256-257 – replacing a bulb ...... 190 – using the manual – identification code ...... 253 – slant compensation ...... 146 gearbox ...... 121 – ignition ...... 256 Fuel Gearbox (specifications) ...... 258 – lubrication ...... 258 – at the filling station ...... 160 Getting to know your car ..... 14 – specifications ...... 254-255 – fuel consumption ...... 276 Glove compartment light – timing ...... 254-255 – fuel cut-off switch ...... 120 – replacing a bulb ...... 194 Engine coolant level ...... 219 – fuel filler cap ...... 143 Engine coolant temperature Glove compartment ...... 126 – gauge ...... 52 gauge ...... 52 andbrake ...... 120-260 Engine oil Fuel consumption ...... 276 H – checking the level ...... 218 Fuel cut-off switch ...... 120 Handles ...... 130 – consumption ...... 273 Fuel filler cap ...... 143 Hazard lights ...... 118 – specifications ...... 274-275 Fuel level gauge ...... 52 Head restraints ...... 30 Engine oil consumption ...... 273 Fuel tank Headlight washer Engine oil level ...... 218 – cap ...... 143 – controls ...... 117

285 – fluid ...... 219 Jack (saloon) ...... 179-180 Oddment – nozzles ...... 230 Jack (SW) ...... 246 compartments ...... 129-239 Headlights Jacking the car ...... 205 Oddment tray (SW) ...... 240 – beam adjustment ...... 147 – compensating the slant...... 145 Keys ...... 17 Paintwork ...... 231 – front foglight slant Kilometer counter ...... 53 Paintwork plate ...... 251 adjustment ...... 145 Paper pocket ...... 130 ancia CODE system ...... 17 – gas discharge headlights L Parking ...... 160 Lancia ICS ...... 62 Passenger compartment lights... 125 (Xeno) ...... 145 – control LEDs ...... 61 – replacing a front ceiling Heated rear window ...... 120 Lubricant specifications .. 274-275 light bulb ...... 191 – replacing a rear ceiling Identification data ...... 251 Luggage cover (SW) ...... 240 Lybra Station Wagon ...... 234 light bulb ...... 194 If an accident occurs ...... 207 Passenger compartment Ignition switch ...... 16 Main beam headlights separation net (SW) ...... 241 In an emergency ...... 175 – controls ...... 116 Performance ...... 268 Instrument panel ...... 48 – replacing a bulb ...... 188 Pollen/dust filter ...... 222 – dimmer ...... 119 Model plate ...... 252 Power steering fluid level ...... 220 Instruments ...... 51 Power steering – dimmer ...... 119 Number plate light – fluid level ...... 220 Interiors (maintenance) ...... 233 – replacing a bulb ...... 192 Pretensioners ...... 42

286 – internal ...... 32 – driving in the mountains .. 167 Radio-frequency remote control ...... 290 – storing external – driving in the rain ...... 166 Rain sensor mirror position ...... 33 – driving on snow and ice .... 167 (windscreen wiper) ...... 118 Remote control batteries .... 21-26 – driving with ABS ...... 167 Rear foglight Remote control homologation.. 290 – when travelling ...... 164 – controls ...... 119 Repeated checks and check Seat belts – replacing a bulb (saloon)... 191 before long trips ...... 173 – front load limiting devices 35 – replacing a bulb (SW) ...... 249 Rev counter ...... 51 – general instructions ...... 36 Rear geometry Reversing light – height adjustment ...... 34 (automatic control - SW) .... 237 – replacing a bulb (saloon)... 191 Rear suspensions (SW) – maintenance ...... 37 – replacing a bulb (SW) ...... 248 – automatic rear geometry – use ...... 34-35-36 Roof rack/ski rack control ...... 237 Seats – fasteners (saloon) ...... 145 Rear window washer (SW) – cleaning ...... 233 – fasteners (SW) ...... 245 – controls ...... 235 – electrical adjustment ...... 29 – fluid level ...... 219 Rubber tubing ...... 228 – head restraints ...... 30 – nozzles ...... 230 – manual adjustment ...... 28 Rear window wiper (SW) Safe driving – storing positions ...... 29 – blade replacement ...... 235 – before getting behind – controls ...... 235 the wheel ...... 164 Side/taillights Rearview mirrors – driving at night ...... 165 – controls ...... 115 – external mirror adjustment 33 – driving in fog ...... 166 – replacing a front bulb ...... 188

287 – replacing a rear bulb – emergency start-up ...... 176 Technical (saloon) ...... 191 – ignition switch ...... 16 specifications ...... 250 – replacing a rear bulb – jump starting ...... 177 Third brake light (SW) ...... 248 – procedure for diesel – replacing a bulb (saloon)... 192 Ski tunnel ...... 141-242 engines ...... 158 – replacing a bulb (SW) ...... 248 Slant compensation – procedure for petrol Tools ...... 180-246 – foglights ...... 147 engines ...... 157 Top speeds ...... 268 – headlights ...... 145 – stopping the engine ...... 159 Towing a trailer Snow chains ...... 172 – warming up a recently – instructions ...... 171 Sound system started engine ...... 159 – aerial (SW) ...... 236 Steering wheel (adjusting) ...... 32 – tow hitch – CD player ...... 99-155-236 Steering wheel lock ...... 16 installation ...... 281-282 – description and operation.. 73 Steering wheel stalks Towing the car (SW) ...... 245 – HI-FI sound system .. 155-237 – left-hand stalk ...... 117 Towing the car ...... 206 – rear speakers (SW) ...... 236 – right-hand stalk ...... 117 Tyre inflation – speakers ...... 154 Steering ...... 261 pressure ...... 163-278-279 – tape player ...... 98 Storing the car ...... 173 Tyres ...... 278-279 Spark plugs ...... 162-226 Sun visors ...... 128 – advice ...... 227 Speedometer ...... 51 Sunroof ...... 131 – if a tyre is punctured 177-246 Starter motor ...... 265 Supplementary heater ...... 115 – inflation pressure ..... 278-279 Starting the engine Suspensions ...... 261 – sizes ...... 262 – bump starting ...... 159-178 Symbols ...... 9 – winter tyres ...... 262

288 – rain sensor ...... 118 Warning LEDs and LEDs Windscreen wiper on controls ...... 61 – blades (replacement) ...... 228 Warning lights ...... 53 – controls ...... 117 Weights ...... 269-270 – nozzles ...... 230 Wheel geometry ...... 261 Windscreen, rear window, Wheel rims ...... 262 headlight washer fluid Wheels level ...... 219 – advice ...... 227 – replacement (saloon) ...... 179 – replacement (SW) ...... 246 – specifications ...... 262 Window winders (electric)...... 136 Window winders (rear) ...... 137 Window winders – centralised window system ...... 136 Windows (cleaning) ...... 232 Windscreen washer – controls ...... 117 – fluid ...... 219 – nozzles ...... 230

289 RADIO-FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL: ministerial homologation International motoring code Country Homologation number

A Austria B Belgium CH Switzerland D Germany DK Denmark E Spain F France GR Greece P4C20002 H Hungary I Italy L Luxembourg NL Netherlands P Portugal BG Bulgaria P-14-540/2001 CRO Croatia SRD 162/01 CZ Czech Republic CCZ JOR Jordan TRC/LPD/2001/01 KWT Kuwait - OM Oman OMA/1150/075/01 PL Poland 211/2001 Q Qatar QTEL/DR/2001/R-215 RL Lebanon 6731/OM RO Romania ATR Nr 67 SLO Slovenia C231-0989/01 SK Sloval Republic R287 2001 N SX Saudi Arabia - UAE United Arab Emirates 5/10-2/2309/3806

290 291

®

® Always ask your mechanic for Oil change? The experts reccomend Selenia.

The engine of your car is factory filled with Selenia, a range of lubricants which satisfies the most advanced international specifications. Specific tests and high technical characteristicss allow the Selenia range to guarantee the optimum and top quality performance of your engine.

The Selenia range includes a number of of technologically advanced products:

SELENIA 20K SELENIA TD API SL lubricant ,which guarantees optimum Oil for aspirated turbocharged or multivalve diesel performance and maximum wear protection to engines, guarantees maximum engine cleanliness aspirated, turbocharged or multivalve petrol engines. and stability at high temperatures.

SELENIA PERFORMER SELENIA WR Is particularly ideal for the protection of new Oil which has been specifically designed for use in generation petrol engines, common rail andMultijet diesel engines. Effective dur- Very effective even in the most severe weather ing cold starts it offers maximim wear protection, conditions. It guaranteees a reduction in fuel hydraulic tappets control, consumption reduction consumption (Energy conserving ). and stability at high temperatures.

The complete Selenia range also includes Selenia 20K Alfa Romeo, Selenia Performer 5W-40, Selenia Racing and Selenia Digitech.

For further information on Selenia products, please visit the website www.flselenia.com. NOTES COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar) Saloon Station Wagon Tyre Average load Full load Average load Full load Space-saver Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear spare wheel 195/65 R15 91H 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2 1.6 205/60 R15 91V 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2 195/65 R15 91V 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2 1.8 205/60 R15 91V 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2 195/65 R15 91H 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2 1.9 jtd 205/60 R15 91V 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2 195/65 R15 91V 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2 2.0 - 2.4 jtd 205/60 R15 91V 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2 205/55 R16 91V 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.5 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.5 (2.8*) 4.2 0.3 bar should be added to the values given if the pressure is measured while the tyre is hot. (*) Maximum load in boot with seats folded + 1 person + 350 kg.

ENGINE OIL CHANGE 1.6 1.8 2.0 1.9 jtd 2.4 jtd litres kg litres kg litres kg litres kg litres kg Engine sump 3.5 3.1 3.9 3.5 4.3 3.8 4.2 3.75 4.8 4.3 Engine sump and filter 3.8 3.4 4.3 3.85 5.0 4.45 4.8 4.25 5.5 4.9 Dispose of waste oil properly.

FUEL CAPACITIES (litres) 1.6 1.8 2.0 1.9 jtd 2.4 jtd Tank capacity 60 60 60 60 60 Reserve 8 8 8 8 8 Refuel petrol engines with unleaded petrol with an octane rating (RON) no lower than 95 only. Refuel diesel engines with diesel fuel for motor vehicles (EN590 specifications) only.

Fiat Auto S.p.A. - After Sales - Assistenza Tecnica - Ingegneria Assistenziale Largo Senatore G. Agnelli, 5 - 10040 Volvera – Torino (Italia) Print n. 603.45.726 - X/2004 - 4th Edition - Printed by Satiz - Turin (Italy) Coordinamento Editoriale Satiz - Torino